JP6439176B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  There is a gaming machine that displays a number of effect button images corresponding to the required number of repeated hitting operations, and a predetermined operation-corresponding effect is executed when the player performs the required number of operations on the effect buttons (for example, see Patent Document 1). reference). In addition, there is a gaming machine that counts the cumulative value of the number of times that the effect button is pressed within the effective time, and displays a button effect image that has a high expectation for occurrence of jackpot as the cumulative value increases (for example, see Patent Document 2). reference). In addition, there are gaming machines that may or may not perform a button operation effect according to an operation when the effect button is operated while performing an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to press the effect button (for example, , See Patent Document 3).

  Further, as a gaming machine as described above, there is known a gaming machine in which a specific display (present display) corresponding to a hold display corresponding to a variable display changes before reaching (for example, see Patent Document 4).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-071102 JP 2014-023623 A JP-A-2015-107205 JP 2011-171 A

  However, there are cases where the effects performed by button operations are fixed and lack interest. Moreover, the timing at which the specific display changes is limited, and it is not surprising. The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention performs a variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) (for example, A gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be operated by a player (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) and that the number of possible operations for the operating means can be specified (for example, FIG. As shown in Fig. 39 (B), the number of operable operations can be specified by the number of operation effect icons, etc. In Fig. 39 (B), the operation possible number "4" is notified by four operation effect icons (ST1 to ST4). ) is first notification means (for example, the effect control CPU120, etc.) for controlling the display of the image display device 5, the operation lifetime for the operating unit (e.g., FIG. 38 (B) shown in Over switch before, during reach a number of operations which are operations on the operation period, etc.) in super reach, and non-operation times that were not operation to the operation lifetime, the steering Sakukai number and the non-steering Sakukai of the total number of the number, identifiable notify at least one number (e.g., identifiable notify the operation count by the number of the operation effect icon overlapped with the end indication MK1 as shown in FIG. 39 (D) 39D, the number of operations “1” is notified by the operation effect icon (ST1) in which one end display MK1 is superimposed, and depending on the number of end displays MK1 as shown in FIG. The number of times of not being operated can be specified, etc. In Fig. 39 (C), the number of times of no operation "1" is notified by one end display MK1, and the number of times of operation as shown in Fig. 45 (A). Total number of times depending on the number of times of no operation (An image display device such as a performance control for CPU120 for controlling the display of 5), operation result presentation in response to an operation to the operating unit (e.g., FIG. 38 (A) second informing means for informing, etc.) cut shown in Operation effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display of the image display device 5) and the expectation degree (for example, the big hit expectation degree) controlled to the advantageous state. Specific display means (for example, current display area 5K, etc.) that displays a specific display suggested by the display mode (for example, current display), or an effect control CPU 120 or display control unit 123 that displays the current display in the current display area 5K. Etc.) and third notification means (for example, a confirmed decorative symbol, etc.) for performing notification regarding whether or not the advantageous state is controlled, or effect control for displaying a fixed decorative symbol CPU 120, display control unit 123, etc.), and the operation effect executing means is a difference between the operable count and the total count (for example, FIG. 42A, FIG. 42B, FIG. 43C). ), The remaining number of operations shown in FIGS. 43 (D), 44 (C), 44 (D), etc.) is a predetermined difference and the operable number of times is the first number of times, and the operable number of times And a specific operation result effect (for example, a strong cut-in effect, etc.) are executed as the operation result effect at a rate different from the case where the difference between the total number of times is the predetermined difference and the operable number of times is the second number. (For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), the strong cut-in effect is executed at a different ratio depending on the total possible number of operations even if the total remaining number of operations is the same, as shown in FIG. 44 (C). And the number of remaining operations during super reach is the same. Super Depending on operational times in reach is performed in different proportions), said third notifying means, particular suggests the predetermined notification suggests that it is not controlled by the beneficial state, to be controlled in the preferred state is capable of executing a notification, in one of the variable display of the execution period (FIG. 51 (B) ~ Figure 51 (L)), prior to the time display mode of the background display is a special embodiment which is different from the normal aspect Kisho A regular notification (for example, notification of temporary loss by a decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 51F) is executed, and the display mode of the background display is changed from the special mode to the normal mode and the display mode of the specific display (For example, as shown in FIGS. 51 (H) to 51 (K), the display mode of the current display changes from white (circle) → yellow (square) → red (double circle) → rainbow (star)). ) and Ru executable der the previous Kitoku constant inform the after.

  According to such a gaming machine, interest can be improved.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) (for example, A gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be operated by a player (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) and that the number of possible operations for the operating means can be specified (for example, FIG. As shown in Fig. 39 (B), the number of operable operations can be specified by the number of operation effect icons, etc. In Fig. 39 (B), the operation possible number "4" is notified by four operation effect icons (ST1 to ST4). ) is first notification means (for example, the effect control CPU120, etc.) for controlling the display of the image display device 5, the operation lifetime for the operating unit (e.g., FIG. 38 (B) shown in Over switch before, during reach a number of operations which are operations on the operation period, etc.) in super reach, and non-operation times that were not operation to the operation lifetime, the steering Sakukai number and the non-steering Sakukai of the total number of the number, identifiable notify at least one number (e.g., identifiable notify the operation count by the number of the operation effect icon overlapped with the end indication MK1 as shown in FIG. 39 (D) 39D, the number of operations “1” is notified by the operation effect icon (ST1) in which one end display MK1 is superimposed, and depending on the number of end displays MK1 as shown in FIG. The number of times of not being operated can be specified, etc. In Fig. 39 (C), the number of times of no operation "1" is notified by one end display MK1, and the number of times of operation as shown in Fig. 45 (A). Total number of times depending on the number of times of no operation (An image display device such as a performance control for CPU120 for controlling the display of 5), operation result presentation in response to an operation to the operating unit (e.g., FIG. 38 (A) second informing means for informing, etc.) cut shown in Operation effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display of the image display device 5) and the expectation degree (for example, the big hit expectation degree) controlled to the advantageous state. Specific display means (for example, current display area 5K, etc.) that displays a specific display suggested by the display mode (for example, current display), or an effect control CPU 120 or display control unit 123 that displays the current display in the current display area 5K. Etc.) and third notification means (for example, a confirmed decorative symbol, etc.) for performing notification regarding whether or not the advantageous state is controlled, or effect control for displaying a fixed decorative symbol CPU 120, display control unit 123, etc.), and the operation effect executing means is a difference between the operable count and the total count (for example, FIG. 42A, FIG. 42B, FIG. 43C). ), Figure 43 (D), FIG. 44 (C), the case of FIG 44 (D) a remaining number of operations, etc.) is predetermined difference shown in such the steering Sakukai number is first count, said operable specific operation results effect as the difference of times and the total number of times is the predetermined difference the steering Sakukai number the operation result presentation at different rates in the case of the second number of times (e.g., strength cut-in effect, etc.) Executed (for example, the strong cut-in effect varies depending on the total number of operations even if the total remaining number of operations is the same, as shown in FIGS. 42B, 43C, and 43D). As shown in FIG. 44 (D), the remaining operation times during the super reach are executed. There may be the same run in different proportions depending on the number of operations in the super reach), the third informing means comprises a predetermined notification suggests that it is not controlled by the beneficial state, is controlled to the advantageous conditions The specific notification that suggests this is possible, and the display mode of the background display is a special mode different from the normal mode in one variable display execution period (FIGS. 51B to 51L). before Kisho constant notification (e.g., notification, etc. of the temporary loss due ornamental design as shown in FIG. 51 (F)) when running, the changes to the normal mode the display mode of the background display from the special aspect The display mode of the specific display is changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 51H to 51K, white (circle) → yellow (square) → red (double circle) → rainbow (star) this time display display mode of change) were capable of executing pre Kitoku constant notification after Oh Ru.

  According to such a gaming machine, interest can be improved.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the operation effect execution means changes the operation result effect according to the timing of operating the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 38B). The cut-in effect executed in accordance with each period during reach, during reach, and during super reach may be changed.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the operation result effect changes according to the operation timing, it is possible to improve the interest.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the first notification unit performs notification of the operable number of times a plurality of times while the variable display fluctuates once (for example, As described in FIGS. 44 (B) to 44 (D), the number of operations that can be performed in each period may be notified in each period before reach, during reach, and during super reach.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can maintain a sense of expectation, so that interest can be improved.

  (5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), when the first notification means has a high expectation that the gaming state is advantageous for the player, the expectation is You may alert | report the said frequency | count of operation possible more compared with the case where it is low. For example, as shown in FIGS. 5, 17, 18, and 20, super reach β (“PA5-1” or “PB5-” is compared with superreach α (“PA4-1” or “PB4-1”)). 1 ”) has a higher expectation degree of jackpots, for example, the operation period is longer in the case where the variation pattern is“ PA5-1 ”than in the case where the variation pattern is“ PA4-1 ”(ie, , The rate at which an operation effect pattern (for example, SEP-D or SEP-C) is determined is increased, and the fluctuation pattern is “PB4-1”. In the case where the pattern is “PB5-1”, the ratio at which the operation effect pattern having a longer operation period is determined may be increased.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player's sense of expectation can be raised depending on the number of operations that can be performed, so that interest can be improved.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the first notification unit may change the operable number of times to be notified according to an operation state of the operation unit. Good. As an example, in the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, if there are all four operations in the operation period up to the first four times (second time during reach), the number of possible operations during super reach “3” (All three operation periods during super reach are all valid), and if there are three out of four operations, the number of possible operations during super reach is “two” ( 2 times out of 4 times are valid during the super-reach operation period, and if there are 2 out-of-time operations, the number of possible operations during super-reach is “1”. The predetermined one out of all three operation periods during reach is valid.) When there is one operation out of four times or when there is no operation once, the number of possible operations during super reach is “ "0 times" (all three operation periods during Super Reach May be disabled).

  According to such a gaming machine, the reported number of possible operations changes according to the operation status, so that interest can be improved.

  (7) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (6), a promotion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. In this way, it is possible to further include promotion effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display of the image display device 5) for executing the operation promotion display 5SS.

  According to such a gaming machine, the operation of the operating means is promoted, so that the interest can be improved.

  (8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7), the first notification means displays the operable number of times by an icon and a number, or either an icon or a number. There may be. Further, the second notification means displays at least one of the number of operations, the number of operations not performed, and the total number of times with an icon and a number, or either an icon or a number. It may be.

  Such a gaming machine can prevent erroneous recognition of the number of times.

  (9) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (8), the first notifying unit is configured to provide predetermined game information (for example, a small symbol display area 5LK as shown in FIG. 39B). The small number of symbols displayed on 5CK and 5RK may be ensured and the number of possible operations may be displayed. The second notification means ensures the visibility of predetermined game information (for example, small symbols displayed in the small symbol display areas 5LK, 5CK and 5RK as shown in FIG. 39B). , At least one of the number of operations, the number of operations not performed, and the total number of operations may be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the viewing of predetermined game information from being obstructed, so that it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered.

  (10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9), the display mode of the specific display can be changed at a plurality of timings during execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 51B). As shown in FIG. 51 (D), the color changes from yellow to red after reaching, and as shown in FIGS. 51 (H) to 7 (K), a temporary loss notification is made. Later, it can be changed from white → yellow → red → rainbow, etc. Also, it can be changed before and after each temporary stop of pseudo-continuous change, etc.).

  According to such a gaming machine, attention can be paid to the specific display at any time.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10), the display mode of the specific display is less likely to change at a timing after the predetermined notification is performed, compared to a specific timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the current display is less likely to change at the timing after the provisional loss notification than the timing before the reach or the timing after the reach).

  According to such a gaming machine, more unexpectedness can be given.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11), when the display mode of the specific display changes after the predetermined notification is performed, the specific notification is performed regardless of the display mode after the change. (For example, according to FIG. 50, when the display mode of the current display changes after notification of temporary loss, notification of a big hit is made by the variation pattern “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”. Is done).

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can be prevented from being discouraged.

(13) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (12), the variable display starts when the first type of background image (for example, the normal background image in FIG. 51B) is displayed. The predetermined notification is performed when a second type of background image different from the first type of background image (for example, the special background image of FIG. 51 (F)) is displayed, After the predetermined notification is performed, the display is switched to the first type of background image (for example, the display is switched to the normal background image as shown in FIG. 51G), and then the specific notification is performed. Good.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can be surprised.

(14) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (13), when the display mode of the specific display changes after the predetermined notification is performed, the display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (for example, , White, etc.) (for example, yellow, red, rainbow, etc.), the display mode of the specific display changes to the special mode after the display mode has changed to the normal mode. May be.

  According to such a gaming machine, interest can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment (also in the second embodiment). FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state transition process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of an operation effect pattern. It is a figure which illustrates an operation production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the presence or absence of operation presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of an operation effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content etc. of the operation effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content etc. of a cut-in effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ratio in which a strong cut-in effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ratio etc. in which a strong cut-in effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the other example of a display of the operation effect icon. It is a figure which shows the other alerting | reporting method by the operation effect icon etc. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining a fluctuation category and a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining a fluctuation category and a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining production patterns, such as holding. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a part of variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in an image display apparatus.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second embodiment), and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the “winnings”, winning at the starting winning port (first starting winning port or second starting winning port) is referred to as “starting winning”, and in particular, winning at the first starting winning port is referred to as “first starting prize”. The winning at the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the first special figure holding memory number (to be described later) ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), a first special symbol game (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A and a decorative symbol (effects symbol) executed in the image display device 5 A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display (also described later) is also established.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), a second special symbol game (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B or a decorative symbol executed in the image display device 5 is displayed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display (described later) is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the decorative symbol variable display (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that permits the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition permitting the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. , When simply referred to as “special figure hold memory number” or “pending memory number”, one or two of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number It may be pointed to. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a grand prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state) is changed.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of winning balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning is More than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, it greatly affects whether the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player. That is, when the grand prize opening is in an open state, more prize balls can be expected than when the grand prize opening is in a closed state. Therefore, when the big prize opening is in an open state, Is very advantageous to the player.

  In addition to or in place of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”. A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative symbols) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of the fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the fixed decoration symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, there are eight kinds of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). Note that the variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily coincide with the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol variation time) As long as the fluctuation time is within.

  In other words, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed.

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second as the hold display area. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second display digested by the establishment of the second start condition) Active display area AHA displaying a special image representing information including active display (also called digestion display, current display) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols executed based on the special map hold information (Digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active Display region, this display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR. The active display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, the active display or the periphery of the active display, characters and images displayed around the active display frame, and the like Information corresponding to the active display is displayed as a special image.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. Sound, voice, or the like that notifies or suggests that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A movable accessory 17 is provided inside the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. The movable accessory 17 performs a predetermined operation in the area of the gaming machine frame 3 as an effect operation. As an effect operation, the movable accessory 17 descends from the origin position, stops with the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 as the operation end, hides a part of the display area of the image display device 5, and returns to the origin position again. Perform the return action. When the movable accessory 17 operates, an effect operation of lighting a light emitting member 9CC described later may be performed.

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC and the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed on the movable accessory 17 on the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member 9U and the game on the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. A light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes other rendering devices such as a device having a vibration unit and a device having a blower. It may be.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and special symbols indicating the symbol “−” are lost symbols. Yes. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous for the player a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state. The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round (each round) after the variable display result in the special game becomes “big hit”, and wins a big prize. The mouth state (open state, closed state) is changed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, and then changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round and keeps the grand prize opening open, and then closes the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening closed. End the round.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening to the open state once per round (changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the grand prize opening to an open state twice per round (during the round, the grand prize opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state).

  In addition, the grand prize opening is maintained in the closed state instead of the aspect in which the round is started by changing the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state as described above (the aspect in which the grand prize opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round). It may be a mode in which the round starts (a mode in which the grand prize opening door is not opened at the start of the round). That is, the pachinko machine 1 keeps the grand prize opening closed without opening the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, and then opens the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening open. Alternatively, the grand prize opening door may be closed to end one round.

  The predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state may not be a fixed (constant) number of times (for example, always 10 times). For example, the predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 2, 8, 16) It may be the number of times.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of executions of the round is the upper limit number (if the predetermined number is a fixed number, the fixed number is selected from a plurality of types. Repeat the round until the selected number of times is reached. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends the execution of the round when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a prize winning opening) even before the number of rounds reaches the upper limit. May be.

  In the round, the big prize opening is either a predetermined time (opening period) after opening the big prize opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the big prize opening occurs. It is maintained in an open state until the period until. The predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 29 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the open state in the round is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds). It may be time.

  In the round, the big prize opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts with the grand prize opening being changed from the closed state to the open state, the grand prize opening is until a predetermined time (closing period) has elapsed after the grand prize opening door is closed. Stay closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round starts with the grand prize opening maintained in a closed state, the big prize opening is in a closed state for a period until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the round starts. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is kept closed in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 3 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is maintained closed in the round is any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds). There may be.

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, each round of changing the big prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big prize opening. Each round of changing from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the grand prize opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that is changed from (second) to closed state (one second) can be executed twice. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the big hit gaming state performs the round of changing the grand prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big prize port (0. It is also possible to execute each round changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) eight times.

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, a round with a relatively long predetermined time (opening period) in which the big prize opening is in an open state (for example, a round in which the open state is 29 seconds) is also called a normal open round. A round with a relatively short predetermined time (opening period) for opening the grand prize opening (for example, a round in which the open state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normal open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the big hit gaming state (short term open big hit state) controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The If the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state than the short opening big hit state, the short opening is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the value obtained by the player in each jackpot game state as the jackpot game state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “hit”, that is, the game It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot gaming states with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of balls)) viewed from the player.

  As an example of the case where the short-term free round is not used, the round is advantageous to the player over the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. A jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times that the winning prize opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time (open time) of each open state, the round (normally open round) is determined. In the big hit gaming state executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit gaming state executed eight times (normally open round).

  As an example of using short-term open rounds, a jackpot gaming state (actually eight rounds of jackpot gaming state) in which eight short-term open rounds are executed after executing eight regular opening rounds, and a bonus game state of substantial eight rounds. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normal open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous to the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of items that can be obtained in the short-term open round If it is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double play in the big hit gaming state of 8 rounds.

  In addition, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not elapsed after the grand prize opening door has been opened, the big prize opening will change from the open state to the closed state if a predetermined number of winnings are made to the big prize opening. However, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a big hit gaming state in which the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to 5 and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (the opening time is 29 seconds) is set to 8 above. A jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds), in which the predetermined number is 10, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state to be executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times. A big hit gaming state in which a normal open round with 12 award balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player by the jackpot gaming state itself (value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the type of state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (for example, , Normal state, time-short state, probability change state) and the period (eg, time-short state, probability change state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit game state (for example, the number of time reductions, ST The value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state may be varied by varying the number of times).

  In the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R probability variable big hit (described later) is set as the big hit gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special game becomes “big hit”. The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal open round controlled after the 16R probability variable big hit (described later) is executed 16 times are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of one of the special game games, the decorative symbol variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative design that is not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation”). Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8, the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, off operation) of the lamp 9, or the operation of the movable accessory 17 and the like (Still, fine movement, movement, etc.) may be included in an operation mode different from the operation mode before entering the reach state.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the reach pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be made different (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). Thereby, depending on which one of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears, the jackpot expectation can be varied. As an example, in the first embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach, which has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach, are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expectation degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, a slide effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative design or the like can be executed as one aspect of the variable display effect. In the slide effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed, thereby performing the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the slide effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed until a fixed decorative symbol resulting in variable display is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and then variable for a predetermined number of decorative symbols. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is established once, the fixed decoration that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols, is performed in a predetermined manner. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  The number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is the number of variable displays (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( 1), the number of re-variable displays (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (last time), and the number X of re-variable displays between the first variable display and the last variable display ( X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the number of times (X + 2) obtained by adding together. In addition, the number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-continuous, The third variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. Further, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. In the first embodiment, an example in which revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5) is shown, but revariable display (revariation) may be performed three or more times. .

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reach is established, any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be. The chance symbol can be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect will be executed or that the expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect is executed or that the expectation level of the big hit is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display, a message window display, etc. There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing).

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed as the notice effect. For example, change start timing (for example, when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol start changing at the same time, start timing at the same time, or when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol do not start changing at the same time. For the first time the symbol that starts to change is the timing at which the change starts, etc.) and the effect that makes the change start order of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol different from the normal time May be executed as In addition, a display operation other than the variable display operation may be executed as a notice effect. For example, an effect that makes the background image different from the normal time or an effect that makes the hold display different from the normal time may be executed as the notice effect. The notice effect may be due to an operation other than the display operation. For example, the notice effect may be based on sound output from the speaker 8, light emission from the lamp 9, operation of the movable accessory 17, and the like.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that notifies or suggests to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning a certain game ball may become a reach state has at least a variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that notifies or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to winning of a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed May be executed (started) before.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning of the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), a hold effect according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR is prepared. It may be. The holding effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs, and a second hold display added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning occurs. Are displayed in a notice mode (addition effect at the time of addition), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode). , And the like), an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed on the display in the display area of the image display device 5. Effect that is acted on or indirectly (holding action effect), or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. When the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) that is the target of action changes, but when the hold action effect effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  Moreover, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be prepared as the notice effect. In the active display effect, an active display to be added to the active display area AHA is displayed in a notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or an already displayed active display is changed to a notice mode (from a certain notice mode to another This includes an effect to change to the notice mode (the same applies hereinafter) (active display change effect) and an effect to be executed when the active display changes to the notice mode, and activates a character or the like in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect that directly or indirectly acts on the display (active display effect), or an effect that is executed when the active display does not change to the notice mode, and displays characters and the like in the display area of the image display device 5 as active display Includes direct or indirect effects (active display effects) Good. The active display change effect is an effect that changes the special image to the notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is a production that changes. Note that there may be a case where an active display change gaze effect that is an effect mode that is at least partially in common with the active display change effect is executed. Note that an active display change effect or an active display change effect may be executed as a main notice effect such as a step-up notice effect. When the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display that is the target of action changes, but when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the time of starting winning) or may be determined at the time of the change. Further, the hold effect and the active display effect may be collectively referred to as a hold effect.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the first embodiment, among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) that become jackpot symbols, the number “3” is used as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. When the special symbol to be displayed or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, “8R probability variation big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is set. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. The round that is controlled when the 8R probability variable big hit is a normally open round. That is, in the first embodiment, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is a normal open round jackpot symbol. The round controlled when the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. That is, in the first embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a normal open round jackpot symbol.

  In the first embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, it becomes 8R probability variation big hit, but the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. In such a case, a “2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ surprise probability ”)” in which a short-term open round is executed may be used. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the “big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are called “big hit types”.

  In the case of 16R probable big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached, and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is the same decorative pattern having an odd number of symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are arranged in three (ie, “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”).

  In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After reaching the reach state and executing a predetermined reach effect, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is a pattern in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, and “8”).

  In the first embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, if the 2R probability variation big hit is obtained, the decorative symbol variable display is started, the reach state is reached, and the predetermined reach is reached. After the performance is executed or the like, or without reaching the reach state, it is only necessary to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot is a different decorative symbol (one of at least three symbols) on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 decorative patterns (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “7”) ”) Or a combination of decorative symbols including a chance symbol or the like (for example, a combination of“ 1 ”,“ accuracy ”,“ 2 ”, where“ accuracy ”is an example of a chance symbol).

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability changing big hit is stopped and the 8R probability changing on the surface. There may be a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variable big hit is reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state in which 16 rounds are executed, and after that, the time-varying control (time reduction control) and the probability variable control (probability fluctuation control) are performed. ) Is performed. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variable big hit has been reached, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability change control is performed together with the time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. Probability change control is a condition in which a special game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as a probability change number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed if the special game of the predetermined number of ST times (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state. The same control as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is performed.

  In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. Time-shortening control is performed when either of a predetermined time-saving special-purpose game is executed and the variable display result is “hit” after the end of the jackpot gaming state. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time-shortening control is being performed, the time-shortening control is ended when the predetermined time-saving special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, based on the fact that 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit is achieved, the normal open big hit state is controlled. Probability change control is performed, and time shortening control is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

  In the first embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) and the ST number (number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit). , 16R probability variation big hit) may be different from the short time count and ST count (probability variation count). In the first embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of certainty variations) and the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of certainty variations) are the same (both are 70 times). The number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variations) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variations). Further, in the first embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit and the number of time reductions after the 16R probability variation big hit are the same (both 70 times), but after the 8R probability variation big hit, The number of time reductions may be different from the number of time reductions after the 16R probability variation big hit. In the following description, a big hit gaming state, a state in which probability variation control is performed, a state in which time reduction control is performed, and the like may be referred to as advantageous states.

  In the first embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the short-term open round is executed twice based on the fact that the 2R probability variable big hit is achieved. Control is made to the open big hit state, and after the end, the positive change control may be performed together with the time-shortening control as in the case of 16R positive change big hit or 8R positive change big hit.

  In the first embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the special game of the predetermined number of STs (the probability variation number) is consumed. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). In such a mode, as a mode of “big hit”, it is good to provide a normal big hit that is not subjected to probability variation control after the end. For example, when an 8R normal big hit is provided, based on the fact that the 8R normal big hit is achieved, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which eight rounds are executed. (Time reduction control may or may not be performed).

  In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good. In such an embodiment, after the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability of change) is not digested until the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of changes with certainty) is exhausted, A probabilistic falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time reduction control.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be frequently executed, and each special figure game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for a decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit, the variation is changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned. , Any one of the decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot and the decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot may be finally stopped and displayed as a confirmed ornament symbol.

  In addition, after the definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big win is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is executed). In the period until it is started, a round-number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot may be executed. Although the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided in the first embodiment, the same applies to the case where a definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Also, in the first embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided, but after the fixed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the normal big hit is derived and displayed when the normal big hit is provided, the final round is ended. In the period (or the period until the next variable display game is started after the end of the last round), the probability variation promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot may be executed.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) executed during the round is referred to as jackpot medium promotion effect (bonus medium number of rounds promotion effect, jackpot medium chance change promotion effect), and after the final round ends The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) to be executed may be referred to as an ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also has other switches (for example, a glass door (non- A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves). In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the first embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R-probable big hit” or “8R-probable big hit” or the type of jackpot Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a confirmed ornament symbol (final stop symbol) in each ornament symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that designates execution of a power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery designation command is a command for causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to execute a power failure recovery process after the supply of power is resumed from the power failure state. Receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes power failure recovery processing.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, the command transmitted as the on-hold storage information may be a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying for specifying whether the first start winning opening is a start winning or the second starting winning opening. A command is transmitted, and a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and a determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  The command E0XXH is an initialization designation command that designates initialization. Receiving the initialization designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes initialization processing according to the EXT data XX (hexadecimal number) of the initialization designation command. For example, in the EXT data, it is possible to designate the initial operation of the image display device 5 or the rendering device of the movable accessory 17. In the first embodiment, the initialization designation command is transmitted to the sub-board in the initialization process of step S71 executed once when the power is turned on in the main process of the CPU 103 described later with reference to FIG. However, the initialization designation command may be transmitted at another timing.

  In the first embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 16A), the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. If it is determined as “big hit”, the big hit type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category A category (variation pattern type) is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command and the big hit type, The variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the category command.

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 17, etc.) for effect control commands such as a change pattern designation command and a variable display result notification command. Used when Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the operation and an input / output port (I / O) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the first embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 for determining the normal display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the first embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In the first embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is provided, the variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, “ PC3 "may be provided. Variation patterns “PC1-1” to “PC1-3” belong to the variation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (surprising) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (accuracy) fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC1-3” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

  The variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-4” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC2-4” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  Variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-4” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-4” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, The data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6, for example, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (the special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. In order to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referred to. Further, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the definite special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display result is referred to as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table 130A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) ”And“ Lose ”are assigned to special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130A, a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state is set. Value) is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high probability state, more determined values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability state. Specifically, in the low-accuracy state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determined values (a value in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy state, more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) of decision values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of being determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state becomes high.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. In the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, a special figure display result in which the predetermined value in the predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit”. May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation) Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, 50) determined values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to 16R probability variation big hits. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determined values (“0” to “0”) more than the predetermined number (specifically, 80). 79 ”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation big hit is more likely than in the first special figure. In the high-accuracy and high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to enhance the expectation that the 16R-probable big hit will be achieved.

  In the first embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise accuracy) is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise accuracy) is provided, in the case of the second special figure game, the case of the first special figure game. A smaller number of determination values may be assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is less likely than in the first special figure, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by extending the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  In addition, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value, data indicating an on state or an off state, and the like for each of a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a variation count value that is a stored value of a variation counter for counting one or both of the ST count (probable variation count) and the short time count.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 and the like are connected. In addition, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected. The effect control board 12 is also connected to wiring for transmitting an information signal indicating a command to the accessory control board 16. The accessory control board 16 controls the movable accessory 17 based on the information signal transmitted from the effect control board 12.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores various tables for executing the hold effect. For example, the ROM 121 has one of a plurality of types of display modes of the first hold display displayed in the first start-winning storage display area 5HL as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display. The 1st hold | maintenance display mode determination table referred in order to determine may be memorize | stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of first hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the first hold display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. . Each first hold display mode determination table includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display at the time of addition for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of the plurality of first hold display mode determination tables, one large first hold display mode determination table including information of all the first hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, in the ROM 121, any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display. A second hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not may be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, as a table relating to execution of the hold change effect of the first hold display, whether the display mode of the first hold display already displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is changed to another display mode. In order to determine which display mode to change to the first pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode. A first hold change mode determination table to be referred to may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables having different determination ratios that change to another display mode and no change to another display mode, and the first hold change mode determination. A plurality of first pending change mode determination tables may be stored in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. Each first pending change presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether there is a change or not. In each of the first hold change mode determination tables, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display after the change is displayed for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables, one large first hold change presence / absence determination table including information of all the first hold change presence / absence determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change mode determination tables, one large first hold change mode determination table including information of all the first hold change mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, the ROM 121 changes the display mode of the second hold display already displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR to another display mode as a table related to the execution of the hold change effect of the second hold display. To determine whether to change to a second pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode, or to change to another display mode The 2nd pending | holding change aspect determination table referred to may be memorize | stored.

  The ROM 121 stores a first hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the first hold display (timing such as the number of changes to be executed later). May be. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first hold change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In each first hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first hold change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Just do it. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the first hold change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good. Similarly, the ROM 121 has a second hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the second hold display (timing of how many changes will be executed later). It may be stored.

  Note that a table including information on two or more of the first hold display mode determination table, the first hold change presence / absence determination table, the first hold change mode determination table, and the first hold change effect execution timing determination table is a ROM 121. May be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). As a table related to the holding action effect to be applied indirectly or indirectly, an action effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the holding action effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. Further, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the holding action effect, when it is determined that the holding action effect is to be executed, the holding action effect effect that is referred to in order to determine which effect mode is selected from among the plurality of effect modes. The mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of hold action effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of hold action effect effect modes that can be determined in the hold effect effect effect mode determination table and the respective determination ratios may be stored. . In each hold action effect effect mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold effect effect may be assigned to each effect mode.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) is not changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or second hold display). Alternatively, a table for determining whether or not to execute the holding action gaze effect may be stored as a table relating to the holding action gaze effect that is applied indirectly or indirectly. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action / gase effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of presentation modes of the holding action gaze effect, the holding action that is referred to in order to determine which of the plurality of presentation modes is determined when it is determined to execute the holding action gasse effect. A gasse effect effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, there are stored a plurality of hold action gaze effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of effect mode of the hold action gaze effect that can be determined in the hold action gaze effect effect mode determination table. May be. Even if each holding mode has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the holding mode effect production mode, each of the production modes is assigned to the respective holding mode gaze production production mode determination table. Good.

  When executing an active display change effect that changes a special image including an active display, the ROM 121 is referred to as a table related to the active display change effect to determine whether to execute the active display change effect. The active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display change effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. Each active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination, with and without execution. Further, when there are a plurality of active display change effects, when the active display change effect is determined to be executed, the active display referred to determine which of the plurality of effects is selected. You may memorize | store the change production production | presentation aspect determination table in ROM121. Specifically, a plurality of active display change effect effect mode determination tables are stored in which the types of active display change effect effect modes that can be determined in the active display change effect effect mode determination table are different from each other. May be. Each active display change effect presentation mode determination table has a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display change effect assigned to each of the effect modes. Good.

  The ROM 121 also has a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable accessory 17). The data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as effects, hold effects for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern is a control for controlling various production operations such as production control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control CPU 120. Thus, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating the period during which an operation on the operation unit (operation means) such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, the control content of the rendering operation when it is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit.

  The movable accessory control data is data for designating the rendering operation of the movable accessory 17. The effect control CPU 120 controls the accessory control board 16 based on the movable accessory control data so that the movable accessory 17 performs an effect operation in a predetermined operation pattern. The movable accessory control data includes at least one operation pattern of the movable accessory 17. However, the movable accessory control data may include a plurality of operation patterns of the movable accessory 17.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  The effect control pattern may include control data for controlling the initial operation of the effect device. As described above, the initial operation of the effect device is an operation executed to confirm the operation of the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, or the movable accessory 17. The effect control CPU 120 can cause the effect device to initially operate in a predetermined operation pattern by executing an effect control pattern including an operation pattern of an initial operation of the effect device. The plurality of operation patterns of the initial operation can be realized by preparing a plurality of effect control patterns for executing the initial operation and selecting a predetermined effect control pattern from the plurality of effect control patterns. . The effect control pattern selected in the initial operation may be designated based on the EXT data XX of the initialization designation command E0XXH, for example. The effect control pattern selected in the initial operation may be selected based on a predetermined condition by the effect control CPU 120 that has received the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches one of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, which is specified by the operation detection control data. In the operation effective period (also referred to as an operation period) in which the operation is effective, control for receiving the operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and determining the production content is performed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to operate the movable accessory 17 in a manner specified by the movable accessory control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. And the control of the movable accessory 17 and the like is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, a plurality of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, or the like. Types of flags are provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the probability change flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like for each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the display area of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value, which is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the first embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Accordingly, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  In the first embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In the first embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C, the contents of the determination concerning the prefetching notice effects related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the first embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment will be described.

  First, the operation of the game control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 100. In FIG. 11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, The CPU 103) starts a main process after step S001 after executing a security check process that is a process for confirming whether or not the content of the program is valid. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S001). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S002), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S003). Then, the RAM 102 is set in an accessible state (step S005). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch input via the input port of the I / O 105 is in an on state (step S006). The clear switch is mounted on a power supply board, for example. When the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is in the on state (step S007; YES), the CPU 103 executes a normal initialization process (steps S010 to S014).

  On the other hand, when the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is not in the on state (step S007; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the power supply stop process has been performed (step S008). The power supply stop process is a pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to restore the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the internal state of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. This is a data protection process that temporarily backs up data such as the status of the data. Data backup is performed, for example, by storing data to be protected in a storage area (backup RAM area) of the RAM 102 to which power is supplied from a backup power source. Data backup may be performed by saving data in the backup RAM area when it is detected that power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been stopped. Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area can be determined by, for example, the presence or absence of a backup flag that is set when data is backed up. Further, the determination can be made based on whether or not parity data is added to the backup RAM area. When it is determined that the power supply stop process is not being performed (step S008; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from step S010.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power supply stop process has been performed (step S008; YES), the CPU 103 performs a parity check on the backup data stored in the backup RAM area, and whether the check result is OK. Is determined (step S009). In the process of step S009, the checksum calculated from the data stored in the RAM 102 when the power supply is stopped is compared with the checksum calculated and stored from the data backed up in the power supply stop process. The check result is judged based on the agreement between the two. If the power supply stop process is correctly performed, the checksum stored in the backup RAM area matches the checksum calculated from the data stored in the backup RAM area after the power supply is started. On the other hand, if the power supply stop process is not performed correctly, the two checksums do not match. The fact that the parity check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, the gaming state or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped. When the parity check result is not OK (step S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing that is executed when the power is turned on, which is not recovery by the power supply stop processing (step S010 to step S014).

  On the other hand, when the parity check result is OK (step S009; YES), the CPU 103 restores the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state when the power supply is stopped (processing of steps S41 to S44). I do. In step S41, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S41), and sequentially sets the contents of the backup setting table in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (step S41). Step S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing in steps S41 and S42, the stored data remains as it is in the part of the work area that is not initialized. The part that is not initialized includes, for example, data indicating a gaming state at the time of stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  After executing the process of step S42, the CPU 103 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S43), and sequentially stores the contents of the backup command transmission table in the work area (in the RAM 102). The command stored in the backup command transmission table can be transmitted. After executing the process of step S43, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (9200H) as an initialization designation command at the time of power supply restoration (step S44). The CPU 103 may transmit the data backed up in the backup RAM area together with a power failure recovery designation command. Examples of the command to be transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command include the variable display result command (8CXXH), the symbol confirmation command (8F00), the game state designation command (95XX), the hit start designation command (A0XX), which are described in FIG. These are a notification of opening a prize opening (A1XX), a notification after opening a big prize opening (A2XX), a command for specifying the number of time reductions (B3XX), a command for specifying the number of times of variation (B4XX), and the like. By transmitting these commands together with the power failure recovery designation command, it is possible to recover the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped. Receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery process may include an initial operation of the rendering device. After executing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S015.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the clear switch is in the ON state (step S007; YES), when it is determined that the power supply stop process is not performed in the process of step S008 (step S008; NO), or step S009. When it is determined that the parity check result is not OK in the process (step S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from step S010. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S010). The data stored in the RAM 102 is initialized by the RAM clear process. The data to be initialized is, for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for determining per symbol. Data initialization sets the data value to 0, but a predetermined initial value may be set as the data, for example. Also, initialization is performed on the entire storage area of the RAM 102. However, only a predetermined storage area of the RAM 102 may be initialized. The area not initialized may be, for example, an area in which data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determination per ordinary symbol is stored.

  After executing the process of step S010, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S011), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table to the initial values of the work area. (Step S012). By the processing in steps S011 and S012, for example, initial values are set for a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 set in the game control flag setting unit 152. Is done. In addition, initial values are set for various timers set in the game control timer setting unit 153 and used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, an initial value is set for a counter for counting a count value that is set for the game control counter setting unit 154 and used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, initial values are set for various buffers that are set in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  After executing the processing of step S012, the CPU 103 sets the address of the initialization command transmission table in the pointer (step S013), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization command transmission table in the work area (area in the RAM 102). The command stored in the initialization command transmission table can be transmitted. After executing the process of step S013, the CPU 103 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted) such as the effect control board 12 (a microcomputer for game control). 100 notifies the sub-board that the initialization process has been executed, and the sub-board transmits a command for designating the execution of the initialization process to the sub-board (step S014). The CPU 103 may designate a target for executing the initialization process in the EXT data of the initialization designation command. For example, CPU 103 may specify an effect control pattern for selecting an initial operation of the effect device in the EXT data. Further, the CPU 103 may directly designate the initial operation of the effect device such as the image display device 5 or the movable accessory 17 in the EXT data. When receiving the initialization designation command, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the initial operation of the presentation device based on the initialization designation command.

  After executing the process of step S014 or after executing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S015). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update a random value within a predetermined range of random numbers.

  Furthermore, in step S015, the CPU 103 sets a game control timer register so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a CTC (counter / timer circuit). As the game control timer, a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 can be used.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S010 to S016) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the initial value random number update process (step S018) and the display random number update process (step S019) in the main process. When the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, an interrupt prohibition process is executed (step S017), and an interrupt process by the game control timer is prohibited. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, an interrupt permission process is executed (step S020), and the interrupt disabled state is released. In the first embodiment, the display random number for which update processing is executed in step S019 is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not winning or a reach when not winning It is a random number for determining. In the display random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated. The initial value random number for which update processing is executed in step S018 is a count of a counter (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol. This is a random number for determining the initial value. In the initial value random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.

  Next, the game control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to enable transmission of the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table, for example, by turning it off. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a start winning process executed in steps S208 and S211 of the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in step S220 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first uses a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S201; YES), the first special figure reservation memory number (the first special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure hold storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; NO), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; YES). After executing the processing of step S209, the second start port switch is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not 22B is in an ON state (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S203; YES), the second special figure reservation memory number (second special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding memory number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 15) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 15) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the start winning determination process is performed. Exit. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  The CPU 103 is updated so as to add 1 to the number of reserved special figure storage corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, as the start winning time process (steps S208 and S211) shown in FIG. S215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is executed by, for example, executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. To the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is executed by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. To the effect control board 12.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 confirms the state of the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A gaming state is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, for example, by confirming the state of the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. That is, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability state, for example, when the probability variation flag is in the on state, depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state or the off state. If the probability variation flag is in the off state, the low probability state is identified. In other words, the CPU 103 specifies which state the current gaming state is based on the state of the probability change flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  Following the processing in step S401, table data corresponding to the current gaming state is set from the table data constituting the display result determination table 130A (step S402). When using different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, the starting port buffer value is “1”. In some cases, the first special figure display result determination table is used, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data set by the processing of step S402 are set. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) can do.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410).

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; NO), or after any of the processing of step S410 is executed, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations that are different from each other, such as the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from among the tables).

  Specifically, the CPU 103 uses a special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403) or the stored memory number (for example, the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as a use table is selected based on a certain first reserved storage number count value). Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variable category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variable category extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on the plurality of types of variation categories, one of the variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 18A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) using a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 18B is a configuration example of the variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 18C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 18D is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For simplification of explanation, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 18A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 18B to 18D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 17 shows a selection example in which any one of the four types (settings “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL4”) in FIGS. 18A to 18D is selected, that is, the above-described example. This is a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from the four types of variation category determination tables.

  FIG. 18A shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (a variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B), a variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D), numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 18A, among 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3, 0 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 18A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”). ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 18C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determination values of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 18C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 18D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 18D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, the shortened / non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the super reach (losing) fluctuation category ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance whether at least the reach is not achieved.

  Then, after performing the setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 16B to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412 (step S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command. The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern may be determined as follows. That is, the variation category is determined using the random number MR3 for determining the variation category stored in step S218 of the start winning process, similarly to step S412 of the winning random number determination process. Subsequently, based on the variation category as the determination result, one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the usage table and the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number MR5 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern may be determined. In the start winning process, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted and stored in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, and stored in the variation pattern setting process in step S111. The variation pattern may be determined using the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern stored in the time process.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. In addition, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, in the case of one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state), , Processing for adding the counter value of the variation counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, processing for resetting, special figure in the probability variation state (high accuracy state), and special diagram in the short time state (high base state) Processing to determine whether or not the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the probability variation control and time shortening control for controlling to one or both of the probability variation state (high accuracy state) and the time-short state (high base state) are terminated and low accuracy is achieved. The game state transition process at the time of change such as a process for setting one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in an on state. Updated to When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “16R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit”. As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type “16R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the winning prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the opening of the winning prize opening which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times to “16 times”, the normal open big hit state may be set. On the other hand, corresponding to the jackpot type “8R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “8 times” so that the normal open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable accessory 17. Includes a process for waiting until the waiting time has elapsed, a game state transition process after a big hit for setting to start probability change control and time-shortening control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc. . When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S <b> 231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; NO), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game is put on hold, the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the number of first special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; NO), the hold stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “losing”. The data of the display result determination table is set (step S239) in the same manner as the process of step S402 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S402, the start port buffer is used. The value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, but in the process of step S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determined values assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit” and “losing”. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost” (step S240).

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). And when it determines with it being a "hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting part 152 is set to an ON state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the big hit type determining random number value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is set to “16R probability variable big hit” and “8R probability variable big hit”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to the jackpot type is matched, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be made (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “16R probability variation big hit”, the big hit type buffer value may be “1”, and if “8R certain variation big hit”, it may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not a “hit” (step S241; NO) or after performing any of the processes in step S245, the result of a prior decision as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set (step S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, if the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; YES), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111 following the special symbol normal process of step S110, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation category is determined in the same manner as the winning random number determination process (step S220). However, when the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed and the variation pattern setting is performed. In the specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. 18, even if the number of reserved memories differs greatly from the time of execution of the process (step S111), it is extracted at the time of winning a prize. If the random number MR3 is “99”, for example, the variation category “PA5” is determined in both the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process, regardless of the number of reserved memories. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 20A shows an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 20B is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 20C is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 20D to 20H.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is in an on state (step S291). If the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start production waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start presentation waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command is stored in the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It only has to be stored in the area. Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S295), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state in step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a gaming state transition process during variation (step S296). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” that is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing gaming state transition process executed in step S296 of the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. In the changing gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low-probability low-base state (step S451). CPU 103 determines that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state when both of the probability change flag and the short time flag provided in game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state. If it is determined in step S451 that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the changing gaming state transition process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the low-probability / low-base state is not established (step S451; YES), the value of the variation counter is incremented by 1 (step S452). The variation counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the short time number. The ST count (number of times of probability change) is the number of times of execution of the special figure game for executing the probability change control. The number of time reductions is the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control. The ST number (probability variation number) and the time reduction number are set in the hit end process (FIGS. 13 and 23).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S452, the CPU 103 reads the number of STs (the number of probability changes) (step S453) and reads the number of time reductions (step S454). Subsequent to the processing in step S454, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) (step S455). When the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is in the high probability state. If it is determined in step S455 that the current gaming state is a highly probable state (step S455; YES), the CPU 103 indicates that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count) read in step S453. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S456). When it is determined that the value of the variation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) (step S456; YES), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. For example, the gaming state is set to a low probability state by turning it off (step S457), and the probability variation control is terminated.

  After executing the process of step S457, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high probability state (step S455; NO), the value of the variation counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count). If it is determined that it is not (step S456; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (time-short state) (step S458). When the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the high base state (time reduction state). When it is determined in step S458 that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S458; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the short time number read in step S454. It is determined whether the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S459). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (step S459; YES), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and enters the off state. For example, the gaming state is set to a low base state (step S460), and the time-shortening control is terminated.

  After the processing of step S460, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high base state (short time state) (step S458; NO), the value of the variation counter is indicated by the short time number and is not greater than the value. (Step S459; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state has become a low probability low base state (step S461). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state, the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state has become the low probability low base state.

  If it is determined in step S461 that the low-probability / low-base state has been reached (step S461; YES), the CPU 103 clears the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to “0” (step S462), and sets the time-saving count. The value is cleared to “0” (step S463), the value of the variation counter is cleared to “0” (step S464), and the variation gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S461 that the low probability low base state has not been reached (step S461; NO), the variation gaming state transition process is terminated without executing steps S462, S463, and S464.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 23, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the big hit release post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined depending on whether or not.

  If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high probability state (probability change state) (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high base state (step S315). That is, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to a highly accurate and high base state by the processing of step S314 and step S315.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to 70 times (step S316) and sets the time reduction count to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to “0” (step S318), and ends the big hit ending process.

  In the first embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (probability variation number) and the setting value of 70 time reductions are the same value (both are 70 times), but the setting value of the ST number (probability variation number) is set. It is also possible to set the time reduction count to a value different from the set value of 70 times. Further, in the first embodiment, the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 16R probability change big hit is the same value (both 70 times). However, the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 16R probability change big hit. In the first embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). In this case, the set value for the short time count may be different from the set value for the short time count in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability variation big hit.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( In step S219), transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in step S403 or the like is performed (step S410), and the variation category command corresponding to the variation category determined in step S412 Is set for transmitting (step S413), and transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221). After these processes are executed, a command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is executed, so that the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) is set. When the game ball passes (enters) and the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, a start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, Four commands, ie, a variable category command and a pending storage count notification command (a first pending storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal process of step S110, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

  Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are performed. After these processes are executed, the variable control result notification command and the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A variation pattern designation command or the like is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt. Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  That is, at the timing when the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110) is performed, and the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” to control the big hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbols is determined, and the contents determined by each effect control command are determined. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), the winning random number value determination process (step S220) determines “big hit”. Determination of whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, determination of a general variable display mode (fluctuation category) of the decorative design, etc. are performed, and the contents determined by each presentation control command are transmitted to the presentation control board 12 Is done.

  In addition, when the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit), in the big hit end processing of step S117, the ST number (number of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are both 70 times. Set to state. In addition, the variation counter is counted up in each variation when the gaming state is the high-probability base state (step S452), and the gaming state is in the low-probability state when the variation counter exceeds the ST number (probability variation number). (Step S457), and the gaming state is set to a low base when the variation counter exceeds the number of time reductions (step S460).

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71). At the initialization station, the production control CPU 120 confirms reception of the initialization designation command from the main board 11 described with reference to FIG. 11, and initializes the presentation device based on the initialization designation command. As an initial operation of the effect device, for example, the image display device 5 performs an initial screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  After executing the process of step S71, the CPU 120 for effect control clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, sets a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 12, and the like. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is in the off state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waited.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, various effects such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a driving operation of the movable accessory 17 are performed. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is terminated.

  If there is a reception command in step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; YES), a first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If the command is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; YES), a second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; YES), if the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509, S511. After executing any of the above processes, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning (Step S512), the process returns to Step S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; YES), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509. After executing any of the processes of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command. (Step S513). When it is determined that the command is a variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S514). . After executing the process of step S514, the effect control CPU 120 returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  If it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to the other received commands (step S517). For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may identify the current gaming state by analyzing the gaming state designation command. When the received command is a hit end designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the hit end designation command and specify whether or not the time is short. When the received command is a power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may store the power failure recovery designation command in a power failure restoration designation command storage area formed in the RAM. After executing the process of step S517, the effect control CPU 120 returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  Note that when receiving commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determining process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). , A process for determining whether or not a start opening winning designation command is received as a received command, and a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of a hold display when additionally displaying in the start winning memory display area 5H are determined. The process to perform is performed.

  After performing the winning effect determination process in step S150, the effect control CPU 120, for example, in the following steps S170 to 177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. Select one of them and execute it.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5, processing for displaying processing for executing demonstration effects (customer waiting demonstration display), and the like. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform the variable display and other various production operations, the process of determining the fixed decorative design according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result, or the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted and activated. Including a process for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a process for determining various effects (for example, main notice effect), and the like. Yes. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 based on the read control data (process data) and displays it on the display area, and the effect sound signal is sounded. Various controls such as a control for outputting a production sound from the speaker 8 by outputting to the control board 13, a control for turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 by outputting an illumination signal to the lamp control board 14, and a drive control for the movable accessory 17. The production control is executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed completely stopped. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This waiting process per special figure includes a process of counting the number of STs (the number of times of probability change) and the number of time reductions, a process of updating the value of the production number counter, and a process of changing the gaming state according to the value of the production number counter Can include. In this special symbol waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect and updates the value of the effect process flag to “4” when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, and the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol. In this case, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot start process is executed before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, and a fanfare effect is performed, or an effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened) (for example, This includes processing for setting an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. This in-round processing is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, and an effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) For example, an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, or the like) is set. It includes processing to do. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. This round post-processing is executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. When a special winning opening releasing notification command is received from the main board 11, an effect to be executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) The effect process flag value is updated to “5”. When a hit end designation command is received from the main board 11, the ending effect is set and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7”.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. This post-hit processing is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the processing for executing the ending effect, the processing for setting the gaming state, the ST number (the number of times of probability change), and the number of time reductions are set. Processing to be performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, the variable display start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S522).

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the missing combination (step). S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Note that, in the process of step S524, a confirmed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined chance symbol may be determined in response to the case where the changing symbol notice is being executed.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S522; NO), that is, when the special figure display result is “big hit (16R positive variable big hit, 8R positive variable big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 Determines the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the jackpot combination (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determination symbol determination table, etc., the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed on the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined.

  When determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) is, the presence or absence of the promotion effect, and the like. The design may be determined.

  As a specific example, for example, a jackpot combination dedicated to 16R probability variation jackpot (for example, three odd-numbered identical decorative symbols are arranged) and a jackpot combination dedicated to 8R probability variation jackpot (for example, an even number of identical ornamental symbols are provided) In the mode of 3), in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, either the big hit combination exclusive for 16R probability variation big hit or the big hit combination exclusively for 8R probability variation big hit may be determined as the confirmed decorative design. . At this time, when the jackpot combination dedicated to the 8R probability variation jackpot is determined to be a confirmed decorative symbol, it is only necessary to notify that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot before the end of the 8th round as a promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of 8R probability variation big hit, it is only necessary to determine whether it is a big hit combination dedicated to 8R probability variation big hit as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  In the first embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (probability) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise accuracy) is provided, the special figure display result is “big hit (2R probability variation big hit (probability variation)). The production control CPU 120 may determine a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability).

  After performing either the process of step S524 or the process of step S528, the CPU 120 for effect control executes an operation effect determining process (step S529). The operation effect determining process is a process of determining an operation effect pattern (see FIGS. 28 and 29) that is an operation effect effect pattern. Details will be described later.

  In the first embodiment, the operation effect is an effect using an operation of the operation unit (push button 31B or the like). The operation effects in the first embodiment include a promotion effect (described later), an operation result effect (such as a character effect) that is mainly executed as a result of the operation after the operation is performed.

  After performing the process of step S529, the CPU 120 for effect control executes a pending digest process (step S530). Specifically, an active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game), the first start winning memory display area An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL Is displayed).

  More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA. Note that the active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Also, in the process of step S530, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 displays the other hold display as the first. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 5HR.

  After executing the pending digest process in step S530, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control pattern set process (step S532). In the effect control pattern set process, an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation is set as a use pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern. In addition, when determining the operation effect pattern or the like in step S529, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the determined content (operation effect pattern or the like) as a use pattern.

  After executing the process of step S532, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and starts the effect control process timer ( In step S535), the rendering device (production component) such as the image display device 5 is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data (step S536). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command (the special diagram variation time shown in FIG. 5) in the variation time timer (step S537).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 digests the command stored in the first start prize reception command buffer 194A or the second start prize reception command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special game, the effect control CPU 120 is the most of the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smaller buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first start opening prize designation) The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order, and when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the command is stored in the second starting winning reception command buffer. Delete the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands being The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the removed command is shifted while maintaining the winning order.In the process of step S538, according to the deletion or shift of the command, The information stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 is also deleted or shifted, and then the value of the production process flag corresponds to the production processing during variable display. After the value is updated to “2” (step S539), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the operation effect determination process executed in step S529 of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 27 will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the operation effect pattern.

  In the operation effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the operation effect pattern according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation effect pattern A (details will be described later) to 30 when the specified variation pattern is the variation pattern “PA4-1”. %, The operation effect pattern B (details will be described later) is determined at a rate of 25%, the operation effect pattern C (details will be described later) is determined at a rate of 20%, and the operation effect pattern D (details are described in detail). (Described later) is determined at a rate of 15%, an operation effect pattern E (details will be described later) is determined at a rate of 10%, and an operation effect pattern F (details will be described later) is determined at a rate of 0%. The ROM 121 stores a table (referred to as an operation effect pattern determination table A for convenience of description) that is referred to when the specified change pattern is the change pattern “PA4-1”. In the table A, the operation effect pattern A to the operation effect pattern F are determined so that each of the operation effect pattern A to the operation effect pattern F is determined at the above-described ratio (30: 25: 20: 15: 10: 0). It is only necessary that a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining an operation effect pattern is assigned to each. When the specified variation pattern is the variation pattern “PA5-1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the operation effect pattern A at a rate of 25% and sets the operation effect pattern B to 20%. The operation effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 20%, the operation effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 20%, the operation effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 15%, and the operation effect pattern F is set to 0. % Is determined. The ROM 121 stores a table (referred to as an operation effect pattern determination table B for convenience of explanation) that is referred to when the specified change pattern is the change pattern “PA5-1”. In the table B, the operation effect pattern A to the operation effect pattern F are determined so that each of the operation effect pattern A to the operation effect pattern F is determined at the above-described ratio (25: 20: 20: 20: 15: 0). It is only necessary that a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining an operation effect pattern is assigned to each. The effect control CPU 120 determines one of the operation effect patterns in the same manner even when the specified variation pattern is the variation pattern “PB4-1” or “PB5-1”. The effect control CPU 120 does not determine the operation effect pattern when the variation pattern is other than the above.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an operation effect pattern (a diagram illustrating the contents of each operation effect pattern).

(Outline of each item in FIG. 29)
In FIG. 29, the column “first character effect” indicates the contents of the first character effect. The column “second character effect” indicates the contents of the second character effect. The column of “promotion effect execution rate (%)” indicates the rate at which the promotion effect is executed. The promotion effect in the operation effect pattern is an effect that promotes the operation of the push button 31B for a player who has not yet operated the push button 31B. The column “effective operation” indicates an operation method (long press, continuous hitting) of the push button 31B effective for executing the character effect (first character effect, second character effect). The column of “execution timing of second character effect” indicates the timing at which the second character effect is executed. The “long push limit execution rate (%)” column indicates the rate at which long press limit (described later) is executed. Note that the long press is a state in which the button is kept pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

  In the first embodiment, the effective operation is both continuous hit and long press, and after the first character effect is executed by continuous hit, the second character effect is executed, but the first character effect is executed by long press. After that, the second character effect is executed while the second character effect is not executed (in the case of operation effect patterns C and F (details will be described later)) or while the first character effect is being executed by repeated hits. In a mode in which the second character effect is not executed while the first character effect is being executed by the long press (in the case of the operation effect pattern D (details will be described later)), the first character effect is generated by the long press and repeated hits. When it is executed (for example, when the first character effect is initially pressed for a long time and is hit repeatedly in the middle), the second character effect is executed on condition that the long press restriction is not executed. To do. That is, in the above-described aspect, when the first character effect is executed by long press and continuous hitting, and the long press restriction is not executed, the second character effect is executed after (or during execution) of the first character effect. Is executed, and when the long press restriction is executed, the second character effect is not executed after (or during execution) of the first character effect. That is, the long press restriction is to restrict the execution of the second character effect when the first character effect is executed by the long press and repeated hits.

(Contents of operation effect pattern A)
The operation effect pattern A is an operation effect pattern in which the first character effect can be executed. Specifically, in the operation effect pattern A, the first character effect is executed when there is an effective operation within the operation effective period (long operation is an effective operation in the operation effect pattern A). In the first character effect in the operation effect pattern A, a white character a (hereinafter referred to as “white character a”) is displayed.

  In the operation effect pattern A, the promotion effect is executed at a rate of 55%. That is, when determining the operation effect pattern A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the promotion effect at a rate of 55% and determines the execution of the promotion effect at a rate of 45%. The ROM 121 stores a table (for the convenience of explanation, a promotion effect execution presence / absence determination table A) that is referred to when the operation effect pattern A is determined. The promotion effect execution presence / absence determination table A is executed and executed. It is only necessary that a determination value to be compared with a random number value for determining whether or not to execute a promotion effect be assigned to each of those without execution so that each of them is determined at the above-described ratio (55:45). .

  In the operation effect pattern A, since the second character effect is not executed, the “second character effect” field, the “second character effect execution timing” field, and the “long press limit execution rate (%)”. "-" Column is "-".

(Contents of operation effect pattern B)
The operation effect pattern B is an operation effect pattern in which the first character effect and the second character effect can be executed. Specifically, in the operation effect pattern B, when there is an effective operation within the operation effective period (in the operation effect pattern B, continuous hitting is an effective operation), when the first character effect is executed and the continuous hitting is successful. The second character effect is executed after the execution of the first character effect (see “execution timing of the second character effect”). On the other hand, if the continuous hit is not successful (failed), the second character effect is not executed. The success of continuous hitting means that the push button 31B is pressed a predetermined number of times or more within the operation effective period.

  In the first character effect in the operation effect pattern B, the white character a is displayed. In the second character effect in the operation effect pattern B, a white character b (hereinafter referred to as “white character b”) is displayed after the execution of the first character effect.

  In the operation effect pattern B, the promotion effect is executed at a rate of 60%. That is, when the operation effect pattern B is determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the promotion effect is executed at a rate of 60% and determines that the promotion effect is not executed at a rate of 40%. The method for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect is the same as in the case of the operation effect pattern A.

  In the operation effect pattern B, the second character effect is executed after execution of the first character effect. However, since the effective operation is repeated hitting (because the first character effect is not executed by long pressing), The “long press limit execution ratio (%)” column is “−”.

(Contents of operation effect pattern C)
The operation effect pattern C is an operation effect pattern in which the first character effect and the second character effect can be executed. Specifically, in the operation effect pattern C, when there is a continuous hit among the effective operations (in the operation effect pattern C, continuous hit and long press are effective operations) within the operation effective period (when there is no long press, long press and continuous hit). If there is any, the first character effect is executed, and if the consecutive hits are successful, after the first character effect is executed (see “execution timing of the second character effect”). If the second character effect is executed and the continuous hitting fails, the second character effect is not executed after the first character effect is executed. Further, in the operation effect pattern C, when there is a long press among the effective operations (when there is no continuous hit. When there is a long press and a continuous hit, the first character effect is executed and the long press is performed). Even if the success or failure of the long press fails, the second character effect is not executed after the first character effect is executed. The successful long press means that the push button 31B is continuously pressed for a predetermined time or more within the operation effective period.

  In the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C, the white character a is displayed. In the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C, the character a is changed from the white character a to the red character a (hereinafter referred to as “red character a”) when successive hits are successful or long press is successful. The color of the character a is not changed from the white character a to the red character a when continuous hitting fails or long press fails. In the second character effect in the operation effect pattern C, the white character b is displayed after the execution of the first character effect, and then the color of the character b is changed to a red character b (hereinafter referred to as “red character b”). Is done.

  In the operation effect pattern C, the promotion effect is executed at a rate of 65%. That is, when the operation effect pattern C is determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the promotion effect at a ratio of 65% and determines the execution of the promotion effect at a ratio of 35%. The method for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect is the same as in the case of the operation effect pattern A.

(When there is a long press and repeated hits in the operation effect pattern C)
In the operation effect pattern C, the long press restriction is executed at a rate of 30%. That is, when determining the operation effect pattern C, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the long press restriction is executed at a rate of 30% and determines that the long press limit is not executed at a rate of 70%. The ROM 121 stores a table that is referred to when the operation effect pattern C is determined (for convenience of explanation, the long-press restriction execution presence / absence determination table A). The determination value to be compared with the random value for determining whether or not to execute the long press restriction is assigned to each of the executions without execution so that each of the executions is determined at the above-described ratio (30:70). Just do it.

  That is, when the long press restriction is not executed in the operation effect pattern C, the second character effect is executed after the first character effect is executed by the long press and repeated hits. When the long press restriction is executed in the operation effect pattern C, the second character effect is not executed after the first character effect is executed by the long press and repeated hits.

(Contents of operation effect pattern D)
The operation effect pattern D is an operation effect pattern in which the first character effect and the second character effect can be executed. Specifically, in the operation effect pattern D, when there is a continuous hit among the effective operations (in the operation effect pattern D, continuous hit and long press are valid operations) within the operation effective period (when there is no long press, long press and continuous hit). In the case where there is an error, the first character effect is executed, and the second character effect is executed while the first character effect is being executed (see “execution timing of the second character effect”). Further, in the operation effect pattern D, when there is a long press among the effective operations (when there is no continuous hit, as will be described later when there is a long press and a continuous hit), only the first character effect is executed, It is not executed for the 2-character production.

  The first character effect in the operation effect pattern D is the same as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C. In the second character effect in the operation effect pattern D, the white character b is displayed during the execution of the first character effect, and then the color of the character b is changed to the red character b.

  In the operation effect pattern D, the promotion effect is executed at a rate of 70%. In other words, when determining the operation effect pattern D, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the promotion effect at a rate of 70% and determines the execution of the promotion effect at a rate of 30%. The method for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect is the same as in the case of the operation effect pattern A.

(When there is a long press and repeated hits in the operation effect pattern D)
In the operation effect pattern D, the long press restriction is executed at a rate of 50%. That is, when determining the operation effect pattern D, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the long press restriction is executed at a ratio of 50%, and determines that the long press restriction is not executed at a ratio of 50%. The ROM 121 stores a table that is referred to when the operation effect pattern D is determined (for convenience of explanation, a long-press restriction execution presence / absence determination table B). The determination value to be compared with the random value for determining whether or not to execute the long press restriction is assigned to each of the executions without execution so that each of the executions is determined at the above-described ratio (50:50). Just do it.

  That is, when the long press restriction is not executed in the operation effect pattern D, the second character effect is executed even when the first character effect is executed by the long press and repeated hits. When the long press restriction is executed in the operation effect pattern D, the second character effect is not executed when the first character effect is executed by the long press and repeated hits.

(Contents of operation effect pattern E)
The operation effect pattern E is an operation effect pattern in which the first character effect and the second character effect can be executed. Specifically, after the second character effect is executed, the operation effect pattern E is the first character when there is an effective operation within the operation effective period (in the operation effect pattern E, continuous hit and long press are effective operations). Perform the production.

  The first character effect in the operation effect pattern E is the same as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C. In the second character effect in the operation effect pattern E, the white character b is displayed before the first character effect is executed, and then the color of the character b is changed to the red character b.

  In the operation effect pattern E, the first character effect is executed after execution of the second character effect (because the second character effect is not executed after execution of the first character effect). The “execution ratio (%)” column is “−”.

(Contents of operation effect pattern F)
The operation effect pattern F is an operation effect pattern in which the first character effect and the second character effect can be executed. In the operation effect pattern F, in the second character effect, the color of the character b is changed up to the rainbow character b (hereinafter referred to as “rainbow character b”), and the execution ratio of the long press restriction is 100. % Is different from the operation effect pattern C. That is, in the operation effect pattern F, the second character effect is not executed after the first character effect is executed by the long press and the continuous hit, but the second character executed after the first character effect is executed by the continuous hit. In the production, the white character b is displayed, then the red character b is displayed, and then the rainbow character b is displayed.

  Next, a display operation example using an operation effect pattern will be described. 30 to 33 are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the display area of the image display device 5.

(Display operation example 1 shown in FIG. 30)
FIG. 30 is a first display operation example. Display operation example 1 is a display operation example of the display area of the image display device 5 when the operation effect pattern C is determined. In addition, although the execution ratio of the promotion effect in the operation effect pattern C is 65% (see FIG. 29), the display operation example 1 shows a case where it is determined to execute the promotion effect.

  FIG. 30A shows a scene in a reach state. FIG. 30B shows a scene where the promotion effect is executed in the reach state. In FIG. 30B, for the player who has not yet operated the push button 31B, the operation promotion display 5SS1, the operation promotion display 5SS2, the operation gauge 5G, and the timer gauge 5T are displayed. The operation is promoted.

  The operation promotion display 5SS1 prompts the player to operate the push button 31B visually. The operation promotion display 5SS2 is a display for notifying the player of an effective operation. The effective operation of the operation effect pattern C is continuous hit and long press (see FIG. 29), but in FIG. 30B, “continuous hit!” Is displayed. The operation promotion display 5SS2 is the character “continuous hit!”, But may be the character “long press!” Or the character “continuous hit / long press” instead of the character “continuous hit!”. That is, when there are a plurality of effective operations, the operation promotion display 5SS2 only needs to notify at least one of the plurality of effective operations. Since the operation promotion display 5SS2 notifies at least one of the plurality of effective operations, the player can search for an effective operation other than the effective operation notified by the operation promotion display 5SS2. Interest is improved.

  The operation gauge 5G is a display for notifying the player's operation amount on the push button 31B. The effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the operation gauge 5G from “0” to “max” in accordance with the increase in the operation amount. The production control CPU 120 sets the value of the operation gauge 5G to “max” when the operation (continuous hitting, long press) is successful. The operation gauge 5G allows the player to recognize that the performed operation is valid, the approximate operation amount required until the operation is successful, and the successful operation. Note that the value of the operation gauge 5G shown in FIG. 30B is “0”, indicating that an effective operation has not yet been performed.

  The timer gauge 5T is a display for informing the operation effective period of the operation on the push button 31B. The effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the timer gauge 5T from “0” to “Time UP” in accordance with the decrease in the operation valid period. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value to “0” at the start of the operation effective period and sets the value to “Time UP” at the end of the operation effective period. With the timer gauge 5T, the player can recognize that the present is the operation effective period, the approximate length of the remaining operation effective period, the end of the operation effective period, and the like. Note that the value of the timer gauge 5T shown in FIG. 30B is “0”, indicating that it is the start of the operation valid period.

  Further, in FIG. 30B, small symbols obtained by reducing the decorative symbols are displayed in the small symbol display areas 5LK, 5CK, and 5RK. The small symbol in FIG. 30B can be visually recognized even when the promotion effect (display of the operation promotion display 5SS1, the operation promotion display 5SS2, the operation gauge 5G, and the timer gauge 5T) is executed. In other words, the execution of the promotion effect does not disturb the visual recognition of the variable display state.

  FIG. 30C1 shows a scene where the operation (continuous hitting, long press) is not successful and the operation fails. In FIG. 30 (C1), the value of the operation gauge 5G does not become “max”, but the value of the timer gauge 5T becomes “Time UP”. In FIG. 30 (C1), the first character effect display 5SE1a indicates that the white character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C. That is, the value of the operation gauge 5G is not “max” but is not “0” (because the operation failed, but the operation was performed), so the effect control CPU 120 uses white as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C. Character a is displayed. That is, since repeated hits or long presses have failed, the color of the character a is not changed from the white character a to the red character a but remains the white character a.

  FIG. 30C2 shows a scene where the long press is successful. In FIG. 30 (C2), the value of the operation gauge 5G is “max” before the value of the timer gauge 5T becomes “Time UP”. In FIG. 30 (C2), the first character effect display 5SE1b indicates that the red character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C. That is, since the value of the operation gauge 5G is “max” (because the long press has succeeded), the effect control CPU 120 displays the red character a as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C. That is, since the long press has been successful, the color of the character a is changed from the white character a to the red character a.

  FIG. 30 (C3) shows a scene in which continuous hitting was successful. In FIG. 30 (C3), the value of the operation gauge 5G is “max” before the value of the timer gauge 5T becomes “Time UP”. In FIG. 30 (C2), the first character effect display 5SE1b indicates that the red character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C. That is, since the value of the operation gauge 5G is “max” (because consecutive hits are successful), the effect control CPU 120 displays the red character a as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C. That is, since the continuous hitting is successful, the color of the character a is changed from the white character a to the red character a.

  FIG. 30D illustrates a scene following FIG. 30C3. 30D, the second character effect display 5SE2 indicates that the second character effect in the operation effect pattern C is being executed. That is, since consecutive hits are successful, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second character effect after the execution of the first character effect.

  In FIG. 30D, for convenience of description, description regarding the color of the character b is omitted in the second character effect display 5SE2. The same applies to the second character effect display 5SE2 in other figures (FIG. 31C, FIG. 32D3, and FIG. 33B). In FIG. 30D, the red character b is displayed after the white character b as the second character effect in the operation effect pattern C.

  FIG. 30E illustrates a scene following FIG. 30C1, FIG. 30C2, and FIG. This shows that the effect by the operation effect pattern C is finished and the display returns to the reach state display. The same applies to FIGS. 31D and 33E. In FIG. 32, the scene corresponding to FIG. 30E is omitted.

(Display operation example 2 shown in FIG. 31)
FIG. 31 is a second display operation example. The display operation example 2 is another display operation example when the operation effect pattern C is determined. The execution ratio of the promotion effect in the operation effect pattern C is 65%, but the display operation example 2 shows a case where it is determined that the promotion effect is not executed.

  In FIG. 31, FIG. 31A is the same as FIG. 31B1 is the same as FIG. 30C1, FIG. 31B2 is the same as FIG. 30C2, and FIG. 31B3 is the same as FIG. 30C3. That is, in FIG. 31, there is no scene corresponding to FIG. That is, if it is determined not to execute the promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 gives the player who has not yet operated the push button 31B the operation promotion display 5SS1, the operation promotion display 5SS2, the operation gauge 5G, and Timer gauge 5T is not displayed.

  In FIG. 31, FIG. 31C is the same as FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 replaces execution of the second character effect even if there is no operation by the player after successive hits are successful and the first character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 31. As shown in the above, the second character effect may be executed when there is an operation by the player after the successive hits are successful and the first character effect is executed.

(Display operation example 3 shown in FIG. 32)
FIG. 32 is a third display operation example. Display operation example 3 is a display operation example when the operation effect pattern D is determined. In addition, although the execution ratio of the promotion effect in the operation effect pattern D is 70%, the display operation example 3 shows a case where it is determined to execute the promotion effect.

  32A is the same as FIG. 30A. FIG. 32B is a scene of the promotion effect, but is different from the scene of the promotion effect shown in FIG. 30B in that the operation promotion display 5SS2 is not displayed. That is, when it is determined to execute the promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 gives the player who has not yet operated the push button 31B the operation promotion display 5SS1, the operation promotion display 5SS2, the operation gauge 5G, and the timer. Instead of displaying the gauge 5T, the operation promotion display 5SS1, the operation gauge 5G, and the timer gauge 5T may be displayed (that is, the operation promotion display 5SS2 may not be displayed).

  FIG. 32 (C1), FIG. 32 (D1), and FIG. 32 (E1) show a scene in which the operation has failed. The remaining operation period in FIG. 32 (E1) is the same as that in FIG. 30 (C1). That is, FIG. 32 (C1) and FIG. 32 (D1) show a scene before FIG. 30 (C1) as a scene where the operation failed. Specifically, FIG. 32 (C1) shows a scene where a little time has passed since the operation (continuous hit or long press) is started, and FIG. 32 (D1) shows a scene when the operation is further continued. (E1) shows a scene where the operation has failed. Since the operation has failed, the white character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D in FIG.

  In FIG. 32 (C1), the first character effect display 5SE1a indicates that the white character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D. That is, since the operation (continuous hit or long press) is started, the effect control CPU 120 displays the white character a as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D. The same applies to FIG. 32 (D1).

  In FIG. 32 (E1), the first character effect display 5SE1a indicates that the white character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D. That is, since the operation has failed, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the white character a as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D (does not display the red character a).

  In FIG. 32 (C1), FIG. 32 (D1), and FIG. 32 (E1), unlike FIG. 30 (C1), the operation promotion display 5SS2 is not displayed. When long press succeeds (FIG. 32 (C2), FIG. 32 (D2), FIG. 32 (E2)), When continuous hit succeeds (FIG. 32 (C3), FIG. 32 (D3), FIG. 32 (E3)) The same applies to.

  FIG. 32 (C2), FIG. 32 (D2), and FIG. 32 (E2) show a scene where the long press is successful. The remaining operation period of FIG. 32 (E2) is the same as that of FIG. 30 (C2). That is, FIG. 32 (C2) and FIG. 32 (D2) show a scene before FIG. 30 (C2) as a scene where the long press is successful. Specifically, FIG. 32 (C2) shows a scene where a little time has passed since the long press was started, FIG. 32 (D2) shows a scene when the long press is further continued, and FIG. It shows a scene where the long press was successful. Since the long press has succeeded, the red character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D in FIG.

  In FIG. 32 (C2), the first character effect display 5SE1a indicates that the white character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D. That is, since the long press has been started, the effect control CPU 120 displays the white character a as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D. The same applies to FIG. 32 (D2).

  In FIG. 32 (E2), the first character effect display 5SE1b indicates that the red character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D. That is, since the long press has been successful, the effect control CPU 120 displays the red character a as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D.

  FIG. 32 (C3), FIG. 32 (D3), and FIG. 32 (E3) show a scene in which consecutive hits are successful. The remaining operation period in FIG. 32 (E3) is the same as that in FIG. 30 (C3). That is, FIG. 32 (C3) and FIG. 32 (D3) show a scene before FIG. 30 (C3) as a scene where the continuous hitting was successful. Specifically, FIG. 32 (C3) shows a scene where a little time has elapsed since the continuous hitting, FIG. 32 (D3) shows a scene when the continuous hit is further continued, and FIG. 32 (E3) shows a continuous hit. Shows a successful scene. Since consecutive hits are successful, the red character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D in FIG.

  In FIG. 32 (C3), the first character effect display 5SE1a indicates that the white character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D. That is, since the continuous hitting is started, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the white character a as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D.

  In FIG. 32 (D3), the second character effect display 5SE2 displayed on the front side of the first character effect display 5SE1a indicates that the second character effect in the operation effect pattern D is being executed. That is, first character effect display 5SE1a indicated by a broken line in FIG. 32 (D3) indicates that white character a is displayed as the first character effect on the back side of the second character effect. Although omitted from the description, in FIG. 32 (D3), the red character b is displayed after the white character b as the second character effect in the operation effect pattern D.

  In FIG. 32 (E3), the first character effect display 5SE1b indicates that the red character a is displayed as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D. In other words, since successive hits are successful, the effect control CPU 120 displays the red character a as the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D.

  In other words, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second character effect after the execution of the first character effect in the operation effect pattern C (see FIGS. 30 and 31), but executes the first character effect in the operation effect pattern D. The second character effect is being executed (see FIG. 32 (C3), FIG. 32 (D3), and FIG. 32 (E3)).

(Display operation example 4 shown in FIG. 33)
FIG. 33 is a fourth display operation example. Display operation example 4 is a display operation example when the operation effect pattern E is determined.

  33A is the same as FIG. 30A. FIG. 33B shows a scene in which the second character effect is being executed in the reach state. In addition, although description is abbreviate | omitted, in FIG.33 (B), the red character b is displayed following the white character b as a 2nd character effect in the operation effect pattern E. FIG.

  33C is the same as FIG. 32B. 33D1 is similar to FIG. 32E1, FIG. 33D2 is similar to FIG. 32E2, and FIG. 33D3 is similar to FIG. 32E3. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second character effect after the first character effect is executed in the operation effect pattern C (see FIGS. 30 and 31), and the operation effect pattern D is the first character effect during the execution of the first character effect. Although the two-character effect is executed (see FIG. 32), in the operation effect pattern E, the second character effect is executed before the first character effect is executed (see FIG. 33B).

  The display operation examples 1 to 4 have been described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. According to the display operation example 1 (FIG. 30), the display operation example 2 (FIG. 31), and the display operation example 3 (FIG. 32). The second character effect is executed only when repeated hitting is more troublesome than long press. In other words, it can be said that the second character effect is a motivation for performing a relatively troublesome operation and a reward for performing a relatively troublesome operation. Note that the execution of the second character effect is not only for the player who wants to see the second character effect itself, but because the second character effect in the operation effect pattern F is a rainbow character whose jackpot is confirmed, the game whose reliability is to be confirmed. It is also expected by the person.

  In the display operation example 2, the second character effect is executed only when the button operation is further performed. In other words, it can be said that the second character effect is a motivation for performing further operations and a reward for performing further operations. In addition, you may alert | report about operation (namely, further button operation) for performing a 2nd character effect (for example, display of operation promotion display 5SS1, operation promotion display 5SS2, etc.), and it does not need to notify. . In addition, when not informing about the operation for executing the second character effect, it can be said that the second character effect executed by the search is a reward for the successful search.

  Further, in the display operation example 2 (FIG. 31), the screen corresponding to FIG. 30B of the display operation example 1 (the operation promotion display 5SS1, the operation promotion display 5SS2, the operation gauge 5G, before the player operates), And the screen for displaying the timer gauge 5T are not displayed. On the other hand, after the player operates, the operation promotion display 5SS1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 31 (B1) to FIG. 31 (B3). Even after the operation is performed, the operation promotion display 5SS1 or the like may not be displayed. In other words, in the display operation example 2 shown in FIG. 32, the operation before the operation is a hidden command and the operation after the operation is not a hidden command. Instead, the operation may be a hidden command before and after the operation. . In the mode in which the hidden command is used before and after the operation, the first character effect display 5SE1a (white character a) is displayed when the operation is performed, and the second character effect display 5SE2 (red character is displayed when the operation is successful. a) may be displayed, or when the operation is successful without displaying the first character effect display 5SE1a, the second character effect display 5SE2 may be displayed suddenly.

  In the display operation example 3, the second character effect is executed during the execution of the first character effect. Therefore, the player stops the operation with the end of the first character effect, and the second character effect is executed. There will be no disappearance. In the display operation example 2, even if successive hits are successful, the second character effect is not executed unless a further button operation is performed.

  In the display operation example 1, the display operation example 2, and the display operation example 4 (FIG. 33), the second character effect is not executed during the execution of the first character effect (in the display operation examples 1 and 2, the first character effect is performed). The second character effect is executed after the execution of the second character effect, and in the display operation example 4, the second character effect is executed before the first character effect is executed), the second character effect is a part of the first character effect. It becomes difficult to be mistaken. That is, in the first embodiment, the first character presentation and the second character presentation both display characters (character a is displayed in the first character presentation and character b is displayed in the second character presentation). If the second character effect is not executed during the execution of the one character effect, it is easy to recognize that each character effect is a different effect.

  In the display operation example 4, the execution of the second character effect is started before the start of the execution of the first character effect. Accordingly, the execution start timing of the first character effect and the execution start timing of the second character effect are thereby increased. It is no longer fixed, and the game entertainment is improved.

  In the display operation example 3, the promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 32B, but the operation promotion display 5SS2 is not displayed in the promotion effect. Thereby, at various timings or voluntarily, the player will search for an operation for executing the character effect, and the gaming interest will be improved.

  Further, in the display operation example 1 (the same applies to the display operation examples 2 to 4), the operation promotion display 5SS1, the operation promotion display 5SS2, the operation gauge 5G, and the timer gauge 5T may not be displayed at all in any scene. . In other words, all the operations may be hidden commands, and the first character effect or the second character effect may be executed according to the operation under the hidden command. As a result, the player has more opportunities to search for an operation for executing the character effect, and the gaming interest is improved.

  In addition, the display operation by the operation effect pattern is not limited to the display operation examples 1 to 4. For example, the execution ratio of the long press restriction in the operation effect pattern C is 30% (see FIG. 29). However, when the long press restriction is executed in the display operation example 1, the long press and the continuous hit are finally performed. When consecutive hits are successful, the second character effect is not executed. That is, in the flow of FIG. 30, following FIG. 30 (C <b> 3), FIG. 30 (D) is not followed, and FIG. 30 (C <b> 3) is followed by FIG. 30 (E).

  In addition, when the long press restriction is executed in the display operation example 2, when the long press and the continuous hit are performed and finally the continuous hit is successful, even if there is an operation after the execution of the first character effect, The second character effect may not be executed, and if there is an operation after the first character effect is performed, the second character effect may be executed even if the long press restriction is executed.

  The execution ratio of the long press restriction in the operation effect pattern D is 50% (see FIG. 29), but when the long press restriction is executed in the display operation example 3 (FIG. 32), the execution of the second character effect is started. If a long press and repeated hits are made until a predetermined timing (timing at which execution of the second character effect is started if only consecutive hits are performed), the second character is displayed during execution of the first character effect. Character production is not executed.

  In the operation effect pattern C and the operation effect pattern D, the long press restriction is executed at a predetermined rate (see FIG. 29), but whether or not the long press restriction is executed may be fixed. For example, the operation effect pattern C may always have no long press restriction, and the operation effect pattern C may always have a long press restriction. It should be noted that the operation effect pattern F in FIG.

  Note that it may be determined whether or not to restrict the execution of the second character effect according to the period during which the long press is performed within the operation effective period. As an example, whether or not to restrict the execution of the second character effect may be determined according to the period during which the long press is performed regardless of whether or not the long press restriction is performed (restriction mode A below). As another example, whether or not to limit the execution of the second character effect may be determined according to whether or not the long press restriction is performed and the period during which the long press is performed (restriction mode B). In the restriction mode B, when the long press restriction is executed, it is determined that the execution of the second character effect is always restricted, while when the long press restriction is not executed, the second press is performed according to the period of the long press. A mode for determining whether or not to limit the execution of the character effect (the following limit mode B1) and a long press limit while determining that the execution of the second character effect is not always limited when the long press limit is not executed Is executed, it includes a mode for determining whether or not to limit the execution of the second character effect according to the period of long press (restricted mode B2 below).

(Restricted aspect A)
For example, the execution of the second character effect is restricted if the long press period is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/4 or 1/2 of the operation effective period) within the operation effective period. The execution of the second character effect is not limited if the long press period is less than a predetermined ratio within the operation effective period. In the restriction mode A, since it is determined whether or not to restrict the execution of the second character effect according to the period during which the long press is performed, the long press restriction itself may not exist. In addition, said predetermined ratio may differ for every production pattern.

(Restriction Aspect B1)
For example, when the long press restriction is executed, the execution of the second character effect is restricted regardless of the long press period (that is, even if the long press period is very short). . When the long press restriction is not executed, the execution of the second character effect is restricted if the long press period is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio within the operation effective period, while the long press period is effective. If it is less than the predetermined ratio within the period, the execution of the second character effect is not restricted. In other words, if the long press period is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio within the operation effective period, it is determined that the execution of the second character effect is limited regardless of whether the long press limit is executed, and the long press is performed. If the period is less than a predetermined ratio within the operation valid period, it is determined whether or not to limit the execution of the second character effect according to whether or not the long press limit is executed. Said predetermined ratio may differ for every production pattern.

(Restriction mode B2)
For example, when the long press restriction is not executed, the execution of the second character effect is not restricted regardless of the long press period (that is, even if the long press period is a very long period). When the long press restriction is executed, the execution of the second character effect is restricted if the long press period is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio within the operation effective period, while the long press period is the operation. Execution of the second character effect is not limited as long as it is less than a predetermined ratio within the effective period. In other words, if the period during which the long press is performed is less than a predetermined ratio within the operation effective period, it is determined that the execution of the second character effect is not limited regardless of whether or not the long press limit is performed, and the long press is performed. If the performed period is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio within the operation effective period, it is determined whether or not to restrict the execution of the second character effect according to whether or not the long press restriction is performed. Said predetermined ratio may differ for every production pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30, the red character a is displayed as the first effect when the long press is successful (see FIG. 30 (C2)). However, the long press is successful and the operation valid period ends. Sometimes the red character a may be displayed as the first effect. When the operation effective period after the long press is successful is longer than a predetermined time (when the long press succeeds after leaving the predetermined time), for example, a special effect (for example, until the operation effective period is reached) , Display of green character a, etc.) may be executed. The same applies to the examples shown in FIGS. The same applies to the case where successive hits are successful.

  In addition, the operation promotion display 5SS1 illustrated in FIG. 30B or the like is an image simulating the push button 31B, but the operation promotion display 5SS1 may be another image. Further, the operation promotion display 5SS1 may be a still image or a moving image (including a combination of still images such as animation). For example, the operation promotion display 5SS1 may be a moving image representing a state in which the push button 31B is continuously hit (or a state in which the push button 31B is long pressed). In addition, although the operation promotion display 5SS2 illustrated in FIG. 30B or the like has been described as the characters “continuous hit!”, The characters “long press!”, And the like, it may be an image that can image the operation. Further, instead of or in addition to the operation promotion display 5SS1 or the operation promotion display 5SS2, a promotion notification for outputting a voice or the like for prompting an operation from the speaker 8 or a promotion notification for lighting a lamp or the like disposed on the push button 31B is performed. Good.

  Further, the operation gauge 5G shown in FIG. 30B or the like increases in value in the vertical direction (height direction), but may increase in value in the horizontal direction (width direction). Further, the value of the operation gauge 5G may be displayed so as to increase linearly with respect to the number of operations (or operation time) of the player, or may be displayed so that the rate of increase is changed with the increase. Good. For example, when the value is close to “0” (when the number of operations or operation time is short), the increase rate with respect to the number of operations (or operation time) is increased (that is, the increase amount with respect to the number of unit operations (or unit operation time) is increased). When the value is close to “max” (when the number of operations or the operation time is large), the increase / increase rate with respect to the number of operations (or operation time) may be slowed. Further, the operation gauge 5G may change the display color (the operation gauge 5G or at least one of the values) as the value increases. For example, as the value increases, the display color of the value may be changed from white → blue → red. When the value reaches max, it may be blinked to make it easy to visually recognize that the value has reached max. Further, instead of or in addition to the operation gauge 5G, the operation amount may be displayed using a numerical value or the like. For example, a numerical value from “0” to “100” may be displayed according to the operation amount. The same applies to the timer gauge 5T shown in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, when the setting is such that the red character a cannot be displayed in the first character effect (operation effect patterns A and B), the red character b cannot be displayed in the second character effect ( In the operation effect pattern A, the second character effect itself is not executed.In the operation effect pattern B, only the white character b is displayed), but even if the red character a is not displayed in the first character effect, the second character effect is not displayed. The red character b may be displayed in the character effect. In the first embodiment, when the setting is such that the red character a can be displayed in the first character effect (operation effect patterns C, D, and F), the red character b can be displayed in the second character effect. Even if the red character a is displayed in the first character effect, the red character b may not be displayed in the second character effect. Thereby, interest can be maintained suitably. In other words, if the red character a is not displayed when the hard operation is performed in the first character production, the subsequent development is given up, or if the red character a is displayed in the first character production, the subsequent development is performed. You can avoid being overly relieved.

  In the first embodiment, the color of the character b in the second character effect is changed without any player operation (for example, in the operation effect patterns C to E, the character is changed from white character b to red character b). In the operation effect pattern F, the white character b → the red character b → the rainbow character b is changed), and the color of the character b in the second character effect is changed by the player, similar to the color of the character a in the first character effect. You may make it change according to operation.

  For example, in the first embodiment, when successive hits are successful, the white character a of the first character effect is changed to the red character a, the white character b is subsequently displayed as the second character effect, and the white character b is displayed. The color of the character b is automatically changed regardless of whether or not there is an operation, but instead, the white character a of the first character effect is changed to the red character a when the successive hits are successful, and then the second character A white character b may be displayed as a character effect, and the color of the character b may be changed when there are repeated hits a predetermined number of times after the white character b is displayed.

  In addition, the white character “a” of the first character production is changed to the red character “a” before the success of successive strikes, and then the white character “b” is displayed as the second character production. The color of the character b may be changed (for example, changed to the final color when successive hits are successful). That is, in the first embodiment, the color of the character a in the first character effect is changed when the operation is successful. Instead, the color of the character a in the first character effect is changed before the operation is successful. In addition, when the operation is successful, the color of the character b in the second character effect may be changed.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the execution timing of the second character effect depends on the operation effect pattern such as, after execution of the first character effect, before execution, in relation to the execution timing of the first character effect. However, for example, the execution timing of the second character effect may be constant (fixed) in relation to the execution timing of the first character effect. As an example, the execution timing when the second character effect is executed may always be the timing after the execution of the first character effect.

  In the first embodiment, the contents of the respective operation result effects (first character effect and second character effect) executed in response to an operation are similar to each other in that both characters are displayed. However, the contents of the respective operation result effects need not be similar to each other. For example, one operation result effect is an effect that displays a line (for example, a word that is changed from words 1 to 2 in response to the operation), and the other operation result effect has an increase in items. It may be an effect (for example, an item is added according to the operation or regardless of the operation). In addition, one operation result effect is an effect that the character breaks through the wall (for example, the wall is gradually destroyed according to the operation), and the other operation result effect is an effect in which the movable accessory 17 operates ( For example, the amount of movement of the movable accessory 17 may be changed stepwise depending on the operation or regardless of the operation). One operation result effect is an effect in which the color of the lamp 9 changes (for example, a color that changes gradually according to the operation), and the other operation result effect is at least the volume or sound of the speaker 8. One of the effects may be changed (for example, the volume of the sound effect increases stepwise in accordance with the operation or regardless of the operation).

  In the first embodiment, the second character effect is an effect in which the effect mode (specifically, the color of the character b) changes (steps up) step by step, but the second character effect is not necessarily an effect. It is not necessary that the aspect changes in stages. For example, the second character effect may be a cut-in effect in which a cut-in image corresponding to the expected degree of jackpot is displayed once. The same applies to the first character effect.

  In the first embodiment, in the case of operation effect patterns C, D, and F, as shown in display operation example 1 (FIG. 30), display operation example 2 (FIG. 31), and display operation example 3 (FIG. 32). The first character effect is executed in response to the long press of the push button 31B, and the second character effect can be executed in addition to the first character effect in response to the continuous hit of the push button 31B. May be reversed. That is, the first character effect may be executed in response to the continuous hit of the push button 31B, and the second character effect may be executed in addition to the first character effect in response to a long press of the push button 31B. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the first character effect according to either one of the continuous operation or the long press of the push button 31B, and the first character effect and the first character according to the other one operation. A two-character production may be executed. If the first character effect is executed in response to the continuous push of the push button 31B and the second character effect can be executed in addition to the first character effect in response to the long press of the push button 31B, the direction of repeated hit However, it may be easier to succeed than a long press. For example, the time required for successful repeated hitting at a normal speed as a reference may be shorter than the time required for successful long press.

  In addition, the execution period of the character effect of 1st Embodiment is not limited to the period illustrated in FIGS. For example, when the change state is set to the reach period in the first period, the reach state to the state before the super reach development is set as the second period, and the state after the super reach development is set as the third period, the character effect is started within the first period. It may end within one period, start within the first period and end within the second period, start within the first period and end within the third period, It may start within two periods and end within the second period, may start within the second period and end within the third period, or may start within the third period and end within the third period May be.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The contents of the second embodiment include contents common to the first embodiment. For example, the content described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27 is common to the second embodiment in addition to the first embodiment. In the description of the second embodiment, all or part of the description regarding the contents common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

  In the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines whether or not to execute an operation effect in the operation effect determination process (step S529 in FIG. 27), and when it is determined to execute the operation effect (FIG. 36, FIG. 37) and the like. Details will be described later.

  In the second embodiment, the operation effect is an effect using an operation of the operation unit (push button 31B or the like). The operation effects in the second embodiment include a promotion effect (display of operation promotion display 5SS, timer gauge 5T, etc.), an operation result effect (cut-in effect, etc.) executed as a result of the operation after the operation is performed, and the like. including.

  Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 respond | corresponds to the production | presentation aspect of the operation effect determined in the operation effect determination process of step S529 in the process (step S532 of FIG. 27) of an effect control pattern set. Set the production control pattern as the usage pattern. In addition, an effect control pattern for controlling the display of the operation effect icon according to the determined operation effect is set as a use pattern. The operation effect icon is information for informing the number of possible operations (described later) and the like (details will be described later).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step S529 of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of whether or not the operation effect is executed based on the operation effect execution / non-execution determination table stored in the ROM 121. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the operation effect pattern.

  In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the operation effect (step S1000). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the operation effect according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. For example, if the specified variation pattern is one of the variation patterns “PA4-1” or “PA5-1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the execution is not performed (the operation effect is not performed). % Is determined, and execution (execution of operation effect) is determined at a ratio of 40% (see FIG. 35A). Note that the ROM 121 stores a table that is referred to when the specified variation pattern is either the variation pattern “PA4-1” or “PA5-1” (for convenience of explanation, the operation effect execution determination table A In the operation effect execution presence / absence determination table A, the operation effect execution is performed for each of the execution without execution and the execution for execution so that each of the execution without execution and the execution is determined at the above-described ratio (60:40). It is only necessary to assign a determination value to be compared with the random number for determining presence / absence. In addition, when the specified variation pattern is either the variation pattern “PB4-1” or “PB5-1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the execution is not performed at a rate of 40%, and executes it. Existence is determined at a rate of 60% (see FIG. 35B). Note that the ROM 121 has a table that is referred to when the specified variation pattern is either the variation pattern “PB4-1” or “PB5-1” (for convenience of explanation, the operation effect execution presence / absence determination table B). In the operation effect execution presence / absence determination table B, the operation effect execution is performed for each of the execution without execution and the execution for execution, respectively, so that each of the execution without execution and the execution is determined at the above-described ratio (40:60). It is only necessary to assign a determination value to be compared with the random number for determining presence / absence. The effect control CPU 120 also determines that the specified variation pattern is not the variation pattern “PA4-1”, “PA5-1”, “PB4-1”, or “PB5-1” (the variation pattern “PA1-1”). ”,“ PA2-1 ”,“ PA2-2 ”,“ PA2-3 ”,“ PA3-1 ”,“ PA3-2 ”,“ PA4-2 ”,“ PA4-3 ”,“ PA4-4 ”, “PA5-2”, “PA5-3”, “PA5-4”, “PB3-1”, “PB3-2”, “PB4-2”, “PB4-3”, “PB4-4”, “PB5” -2 "," PB5-3 ", or" PB5-4 "), no execution is determined at a rate of 100%, and execution is determined at a rate of 0% (FIG. 35). (See (C)). The ROM 121 stores a table that is referred to when the specified variation pattern is not the variation pattern “PA4-1”, “PA5-1”, “PB4-1”, or “PB5-1” (for convenience of explanation). , The operation effect execution presence / absence determination table C) is stored, and the operation effect execution presence / absence determination table C indicates that no execution and execution are determined at the above-described ratio (100: 0). It suffices if a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining whether or not to perform an operation effect is assigned to each execution.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1000, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation effect is determined to be executed in step S1000 (step S1002). When the operation effect is not executed (step S1002; NO), the operation effect determination process ends. When the operation effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not set the effect control pattern related to the operation effect in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (step S171) to be executed later.

  When executing the operation effect (step S1002; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the operation effect (step S1004). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines an operation effect pattern indicating the type of operation effect according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. For example, when the specified variation pattern is either the variation pattern “PA4-1” or “PA5-1”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation effect pattern “SEP-A” to 40%. The operation effect pattern “SEP-B” is determined at a rate of 30%, the operation effect pattern “SEP-C” is determined at a rate of 20%, and the operation effect pattern “SEP-D” is 10%. (See FIG. 36A). The ROM 121 stores a table (referred to as an operation effect pattern determination table a for convenience of explanation) that is referred to when the specified variation pattern is either the variation pattern “PA4-1” or “PA5-1”. In the operation effect pattern determination table a, “SEP-A”, “SEP-B”, “SEP-C”, and “SEP-D” have the above-mentioned ratios (40:30:20: As determined in 10), “SEP-A”, “SEP-B”, “SEP-C”, and “SEP-D” have determination values to be compared with random numbers for determining the operation effect pattern. It only has to be assigned. Further, when the specified variation pattern is either the variation pattern “PB4-1” or “PB5-1”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation effect pattern “SEP-A” to 10%. The operation effect pattern “SEP-B” is determined at a rate of 20%, the operation effect pattern “SEP-C” is determined at a rate of 30%, and the operation effect pattern “SEP-D” is 40%. (See FIG. 36B). The ROM 121 stores a table (referred to as an operation effect pattern determination table b for convenience of explanation) that is referred to when the specified variation pattern is either the variation pattern “PB4-1” or “PB5-1”. ) Is stored, and in the operation effect pattern determination table b, “SEP-A”, “SEP-B”, “SEP-C”, and “SEP-D” each have the above-mentioned ratio (10:20:30: As determined in step 40), the determination values to be compared with the random values for determining the operation effect pattern are respectively determined in “SEP-A”, “SEP-B”, “SEP-C”, and “SEP-D”. It only has to be assigned.

  The operation effect patterns “SEP-A” to “SEP-D” will be described. In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the cut-in effect is executed according to the operation of the push button 31B during the operation effective period (hereinafter referred to as the operation period in the second embodiment). In the second embodiment, there are four types of cut-in effects: “weak 1 cut-in effect”, “weak 2 cut-in effect”, “strong 1 cut-in effect”, and “strong 2 cut-in effect”. It shall be. The “weak 1 cut-in effect” and the “weak 2 cut-in effect” are collectively referred to as the “weak cut-in effect”, and the “strong 1 cut-in effect” and the “strong 2 cut-in effect” are combined. It may be referred to as “strong cut-in effect”. Further, the “weak cut-in effect” and the “strong cut-in effect” may be collectively referred to as “cut-in effect”.

  FIG. 37A is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an operation effect pattern showing the types of operation effects. As shown in FIG. 37A, the operation effect pattern “SEP-A” (the operation effect indicated by the operation effect pattern “SEP-A”; the same applies hereinafter) can execute a weak cut-in effect before reaching. Operation production. The operation effect pattern “SEP-B” is an operation effect that can execute a weak cut-in effect before and during reach (except during super reach; the same applies hereinafter). The operation effect pattern “SEP-C” can execute a weak cut-in effect before reach, can execute a weak cut-in effect or a strong cut-in effect during reach, and can execute a strong cut-in effect during super reach Production. Operation effect pattern “SEP-D” can execute a weak cut-in effect before reach, can execute a weak cut-in effect or a strong cut-in effect during reach, and can execute a strong cut-in effect during super reach Production.

  FIG. 37B shows the number of possible operations in each operation effect pattern. In the second embodiment, the operable number of times is the number of operation periods set during an operation effect. For example, when the execution period of the operation effect is 30 seconds, the first operation period is set in 4 seconds from 3 seconds after the execution start of the operation effect to 7 seconds after the execution start, and 10 seconds after the execution start of the operation effect. When the second operation period is set in 4 seconds after 14 seconds from the start of execution, the operation period is 2 times, so the number of possible operations is 2 times. The “number of operations that can be performed in each period” in FIG. 37B is the number of operation periods that are set in each period when the entire period in which the operation effect is executed is divided. The “total number of possible operations” in FIG. 37B is the number of operation periods set for all the periods in which the operation effects are executed (that is, the total number of operable times for each period).

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), the entire period in which the operation effect is executed is divided into three periods “before reach”, “during reach”, and “super reach”. “Before reach” in FIG. 37B is a period before reaching the reach state in all periods during which the operation effect is executed. The “during reach” in FIG. 37B is a period in which the operation effect is executed in a reach state (except for a period after the development to super reach). “During super reach” in FIG. 37B is a period after development to super reach out of all periods in which the operation effects are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 37B, in the operation effect pattern “SEP-A”, the number of operations that can be performed before reach is one (the operation period set before reach is one), and the total number of operations that can be performed is One time (the operation period set throughout is one time). In the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”, the number of operations that can be performed before reach is one time (the operation period set before reach is one), and the number of operations that can be performed during reach is one (operation set during reach). The period is 1 time), and the total number of possible operations is 2 (the operation period set throughout is 2 times). In the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, the number of operations that can be performed before reach is one time (the operation period set before reach is one), and the number of operations that can be performed during reach is one (operation set during reach). The period is 1 time), the number of possible operations during super reach is 2 times (the operation period set during super reach is 2 times), and the total number of possible operations is 4 times (the operation period set throughout) Is 4 times). In the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, the number of operations that can be performed before reach is one time (the operation period set before reach is one), and the number of operations that can be performed during reach is two (operations set during reach). The period is 2 times), the number of possible operations during super reach is 3 times (the operation period set during super reach is 3 times), and the total number of possible operations is 6 times (the operation period set throughout) Is 6 times).

  FIG. 38A is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a cut-in effect pattern showing the types of cut-in effects. As shown in FIG. 38A, the cut-in effect pattern “JE1” (the cut-in effect indicated by the cut-in effect pattern “JE1”, hereinafter the same) is a weak one cut-in effect. The cut-in effect pattern “JE2” is a weak 2 cut-in effect. The cut-in effect pattern “K1E” is a strong 1 cut-in effect. The cut-in effect pattern “K2E” is a strong 2 cut-in effect.

  FIG. 38B shows the relationship between the operation effect pattern and the cut-in effect pattern. Specifically, FIG. 38B shows a cut-in effect pattern that is executed when there is an operation during each operation period “before reach”, “during reach”, and “super reach” in each operation effect pattern. Is shown.

(In case of operation effect pattern “SEP-A”)
As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-A”, “J1E (weak 1 cut-in effect)” is 100% when there is an operation in the first operation period before reach. Executed at the rate of The ROM 121 stores a table (referred to as a cut-in effect pattern determination table A for convenience of description) that is referred to in order to determine a cut-in effect pattern that is executed for the first time before “SEP-A” is reached. In the cut-in effect pattern determination table A, “J1E”, “J2E”, “K1E”, and “K2E” are determined at the ratio (100: 0: 0: 0) shown in FIG. As described above, it is only necessary to assign a judgment value to be compared with the random value for determining the cut-in effect pattern to each of “J1E”, “J2E”, “K1E”, and “K2E”. The same applies to the case where the cut-in effect pattern to be executed in each period in “SEP-B” to “SEP-C” is determined.

(In the case of operation effect pattern “SEP-B”)
As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”, “J1E” is executed at a rate of 90% when there is an operation in the first operation period before reach. “J2E (weak 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 10%. Further, “J2E” is executed at a rate of 100% during the first operation period during reach.

(In case of operation effect pattern “SEP-C”)
As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, “J1E” is executed at a rate of 50% when there is an operation in the first operation period before reach. "J2E" is executed at a rate of 50%. Further, when there is an operation during the first operation period during reach, “J2E” is executed at a rate of 80%, and “K1E” is executed at a rate of 20%. If there is an operation during the first operation period during super reach, “K1E” is executed at a rate of 100%. In addition, when there is an operation during the second operation period during super reach, “K1E” is executed at a rate of 80%, and “K2E” is executed at a rate of 20%.

(In the case of operation effect pattern “SEP-D”)
As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, “J2E” is executed at a rate of 100% when there is an operation in the first operation period before reach. Further, when there is an operation during the first operation period during reach, “J2E” is executed at a rate of 20%, and “K1E” is executed at a rate of 80%. If there is an operation during the second operation period during reach, “K1E” is executed at a rate of 100%. If there is an operation during the first operation period during super reach, “K1E” is executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when there is an operation in the second operation period during super reach, “K1E” is executed at a rate of 50%, and “K2E” is executed at a rate of 50%. Further, when there is an operation during the third operation period during super reach, “K1E” is executed at a rate of 10%, and “K2E” is executed at a rate of 90%.

  Returning to FIG. When the operation effect pattern “SEP-A” is determined in the process of step S1004, the effect control CPU 120 determines the types of cut-in effects (cut-in effect patterns) for the total number of possible operations (one time). (Step S1010). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38B, the effect control CPU 120 sets “J1E” as 100% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation in the first operation period before reach. Determine the ratio of Then, the operation effect determination process ends. When the process of step S1010 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control pattern according to the determination content in the operation effect determination process in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (step S171) to be executed later. Set. Specifically, an effect control pattern corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-A” in which “J1E” is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period before reach is set. In addition, an effect control pattern for controlling display of an operation effect icon (described later), an operation promotion display (described later), and a timer gauge (described later) in the operation effect pattern “SEP-A” is set. For example, one operation effect icon is displayed at the start of the operation effect (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 39B described later), and an operation promotion display and a timer gauge are displayed during the operation period. It is only necessary to set the effect control pattern.

  In addition, according to the combination of the variation pattern (“PA4-1”, “PA5-1”, “PB4-1”, “PB5-1” in which the operation effect can be executed in the second embodiment) and the operation effect pattern, A period may be set. For example, a variation pattern “PA4-1” (or “PB4-1”) with a variation time of 40 seconds (see FIG. 5) and an operation effect pattern “SEP-A” with one operation period (one time before reach). ”May be set as an operation period for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) of the time before reach. In addition, a fluctuation pattern “PA5-1” (or “PB5-1”) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds and an operation period of four times (one time before reach, one time during reach, and twice during super reach) In the combination with the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) of the time before reach is set as the first operation period, and a predetermined time (for example, 4 for the time during reach) is set. Second) is set as the second operation period, the first predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) of the time during the super reach is set as the third operation period, and the second operation period during the super reach is set A predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) may be set as the fourth operation period. Note that the length of the predetermined time may be varied depending on the combination of the variation pattern and the operation effect pattern and the number of times of the predetermined time.

  When the operation effect pattern “SEP-B” is determined in the process of step S1004, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in effect (cut-in effect pattern) for the total number of possible operations (two times). Is determined (step S1020). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38B, the effect control CPU 120 sets “J1E” as 90% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period before reach. And “J2E” is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines “J2E” at a rate of 100% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during reach. Then, the operation effect determination process ends. When the process of step S1020 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control pattern according to the determination content in the operation effect determination process in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (step S171) to be executed later. Set. For example, when “J1E” is determined as the cut-in effect to be executed when there is an operation during the first operation period before reach in step S1020, there is an operation during the first operation period before reach. In this case, “J1E” is executed, and (in addition to the previous operation), the operation effect pattern “SEP-B” is executed in which “J2E” is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during reach. Set the corresponding production control pattern. In addition, an effect control pattern for controlling display of an operation effect icon, an operation promotion display (described later), and a timer gauge (described later) in the operation effect pattern “SEP-B” is set. For example, the effect control pattern may be set so that two operation effect icons are displayed at the start of the operation effect, and an operation promotion display and a timer gauge are displayed in the operation period.

  When the operation effect pattern “SEP-C” is determined in the process of step S1004, the effect control CPU 120 determines the types of cut-in effects (cut-in effect patterns) for the total number of possible operations (four times). Is determined (step S1030). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38B, the effect control CPU 120 sets “J1E” to 50% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period before reach. And “J2E” is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control determines “J2E” at a rate of 80% as a cut-in effect to be executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during reach, and a rate of 20% for “K1E”. To decide. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control determines “K1E” at a rate of 100% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during super reach. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control determines “K1E” at a rate of 80% as a cut-in effect to be executed when there is an operation in the second operation period during super reach, and sets “K2E” to 20%. Determine by percentage. Then, the operation effect determination process ends. When the process of step S1030 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control pattern according to the determination content in the operation effect determination process in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (step S171) to be executed later. Set. For example, “J1E” is determined as the cut-in effect to be executed when there is an operation during the first operation period before reach in step S1030, and is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during reach. When “J2E” is determined as the cut-in effect to be performed, and “K1E” is determined as the cut-in effect to be executed when there is an operation in the second operation period during the super reach, 1 before the reach is determined. “J1E” is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period, and “J2E” is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during reach (in addition to the previous operation), “K1E” is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during super reach, and “K1E” is executed when there is an operation during the second operation period during super reach. Corresponding to the operation effect pattern "SEP-C" as, sets the effect control pattern. In addition, an effect control pattern for controlling display of an operation effect icon, an operation promotion display (described later), and a timer gauge (described later) in the operation effect pattern “SEP-C” is set. For example, the effect control pattern may be set so that four operation effect icons are displayed at the start of the operation effect, and the operation promotion display and the timer gauge are displayed in the operation period.

  When the operation effect pattern “SEP-D” is determined in the process of step S1004, the effect control CPU 120 determines the types of cut-in effects (cut-in effect patterns) for the total number of possible operations (six times). Is determined (step S1040). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38B, the effect control CPU 120 sets “J2E” as 100% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period before reach. Determine the ratio of Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines “J2E” at a rate of 20% as a cut-in effect to be executed when there is an operation in the first operation period during reach, and “K1E” at a rate of 80%. To decide. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines “K1E” at a rate of 100% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the second operation period during reach. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control determines “K1E” at a rate of 100% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during super reach. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control determines “K1E” at a rate of 50% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the second operation period during super reach, and sets “K2E” to 50%. Determine by percentage. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control determines “K1E” at a rate of 10% as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the third operation period during super reach, and 90% of “K2E”. Determine by percentage. Then, the operation effect determination process ends. When the process of step S1040 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control pattern according to the determination content in the operation effect determination process in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (step S171) to be executed later. Set etc. In addition, about a specific example, since it is the same as that of the case where the process of step S1020 and the process of step S1030 are performed, it abbreviate | omits.

  In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the cut-in effect is not executed when there is no operation during the operation period. That is, the cut-in effect to be executed in each operation period is determined, but if there is no operation, the cut-in effect is not executed.

  39 to 41 are diagrams illustrating display operation examples in the display area of the image display device 5. In step S1000 of the operation effect determination process, it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed. In step S1004, the operation effect pattern “SEP-C (total number of possible operations 4 times)” is determined, and in step S1030, the reach is reached. When “J1E (weak 1 cut-in effect)” is determined as a cut-in effect to be executed when there is an operation during the previous first operation period, and there is an operation during the first operation period during reach. “J2E (weak 2 cut-in effect)” is determined as the cut-in effect to be executed, and “K1E (strong 1 cut) is the cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during super reach. In effect) ”and is executed when there is an operation during the second operation period during super reach. As a cut in production "K2E (strength 2 cut in production)" it is assumed to be determined that.

  FIG. 39A shows a scene in which decorative display variable display is started. FIG. 39B shows the first operation period (first operation period before reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of possible operations of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. Shows the scene. In FIG. 39B, operation effect icons ST1 to ST4, an operation promotion display 5SS, and a timer gauge 5T are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  The operation effect icon is information that notifies the user of the number of possible operations. In the second embodiment, the operation effect icon is displayed in association with the operable number of times (the number of operation periods set during the operation effect). In the scene of FIG. 39B, since the total number of operations that can be performed is four, four operation effect icons (ST1 to ST4) are displayed. The operation effect icon ST1 corresponds to the first operation period (first operation period before reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of operations that can be performed four times. Further, the operation effect icon ST2 corresponds to the second operation period (first operation period during reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of possible operations four times. The operation effect icon ST3 corresponds to the third operation period (the first operation period during super reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of operations that can be performed four times. The operation effect icon ST4 corresponds to the fourth operation period (the second operation period during super reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of operations that can be performed four times.

  In FIG. 39B, the operation of the push button 31B is promoted by displaying the operation promotion display 5SS and the timer gauge 5T as the promotion effects. The operation promotion display 5SS is a display that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. The timer gauge 5T is a display for notifying that it is an operation period. The operation promotion display 5SS and the timer gauge 5T are displayed when the operation period starts, and are erased when the operation period ends. The operation period ends when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses from the start and ends when the predetermined time elapses, and before the predetermined time elapses from the start. When there is an operation, the process ends when the operation is performed.

  Small symbols are displayed in the small symbol display areas 5LK, 5CK, and 5RK. As shown in FIG. 39A, instead of displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the small symbols are displayed in the small symbol display areas 5LK, 5CK, and 5RK. As shown in B), it is possible to notify the number of possible operations using the operation effect icons ST1 to ST4 while notifying the state of variable display using small symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 39B, even if the operation effect icons ST1 to ST4 are displayed larger (or even closer to the center of the display area), the operation effect icons ST1 to ST4 and the small symbols are displayed. Therefore, the operation effect icons ST1 to ST4 are displayed in a larger size, and the visibility of the number of possible operations can be further improved while ensuring the visibility of the variable display state.

  FIG. 39C shows the operation period of FIG. 39B (first operation period (first operation period before reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of possible operations four times). The scene when there is no operation in is shown. In FIG. 39C, an end display MK1 indicated by “x” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an example. Since the first operation period before reach has ended, an end display MK1 is displayed at the display position of the operation effect icon ST1 corresponding to the ended operation period.

  FIG. 39D shows a scene when an operation is performed in the operation period of FIG. In FIG. 39D, a weak 1 cut-in effect is executed in the display area of the image display device 5. In other words, as described above, “J1E (weak 1 cut-in effect)” is determined as the cut-in effect to be executed when there is an operation in the first operation period before reach, and according to the determination Since the production control pattern is set, if there is an operation during the first operation period before reach, a weak 1 cut-in production is executed. Further, since the first operation period before reach has ended, an end display MK1 is displayed at the display position of the operation effect icon ST1 corresponding to the ended operation period.

  In the second embodiment, when there is no operation during the operation period, an end display MK1 is displayed instead of the operation effect icon at the display position of the operation effect icon corresponding to the operation period (the operation effect icon is displayed). When the operation is performed during the operation period, the end display MK1 is displayed in addition to the operation effect icon at the display position of the operation effect icon corresponding to the operation period (the corresponding display). The end display MK1 is displayed on the operation effect icon. For example, when there is no operation during the first operation period before reach, the operation effect icon ST1 is deleted and the end display MK1 is displayed as shown in FIG. If there is an operation during the second operation period, an end display MK1 is displayed superimposed on the operation effect icon ST1 as shown in FIG. 39 (D). Thereby, it is possible to distinguish (confirm) whether or not there is an operation in the completed operation period.

  FIG. 40E illustrates a scene that reaches a reach state after the scene of FIG. FIG. 40F illustrates the second operation period (first operation period during reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of operations that can be performed four times in the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. Shows the scene. 40F, operation effect icons ST1 to ST4, an operation promotion display 5SS, and a timer gauge 5T are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Since an operation was performed during the first operation period before reach, an end display MK1 is displayed superimposed on the operation effect icon ST1. The small symbols in the reach state are displayed in the small symbol display areas 5LK, 5CK, and 5RK.

  FIG. 40G shows the operation period of FIG. 40F (second operation period (first operation period during reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of possible operations four times). The scene when there is no operation in is shown. Since there is no operation during the first operation period during reach, an end display MK1 is displayed instead of the operation effect icon ST2 corresponding to the operation period.

  FIG. 40H shows a scene when an operation is performed in the operation period of FIG. In FIG. 40 (H), a weak 2 cut-in effect is executed in the display area of the image display device 5. In other words, as described above, “J2E (weak 2 cut-in effect)” is determined as a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during reach, and according to the determination Since the production control pattern is set, the weak 2 cut-in production is executed when there is an operation during the first operation period during the reach. Further, since there was an operation during the first operation period during reach, an end display MK1 is displayed superimposed on the operation effect icon ST2 corresponding to the operation period.

  FIG. 41 (I) shows a scene that becomes super reach after the scene of FIG. 40 (H). In FIG. 40I and subsequent figures, “SP reach” indicating that super reach is in progress is displayed. FIG. 41J shows the third operation period (first operation period during super reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of possible operations of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. Shows the scene. In FIG. 41 (J), operation effect icons ST1 to ST4, an operation promotion display 5SS, and a timer gauge 5T are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Since an operation was performed during the first operation period before reach, an end display MK1 is displayed superimposed on the operation effect icon ST1. Further, since there was an operation during the first operation period during reach, an end display MK1 is displayed superimposed on the operation effect icon ST2. The small symbols in the reach state are displayed in the small symbol display areas 5LK, 5CK, and 5RK.

  FIG. 41 (K) shows the operation period of FIG. 41 (J) (third operation period (first operation period during super reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of possible operations four times). ) Shows a scene when there is no operation. Since there is no operation in the first operation period during super reach, an end display MK1 is displayed instead of the operation effect icon ST3 corresponding to the operation period.

  FIG. 41L illustrates a scene when an operation is performed in the operation period of FIG. In FIG. 41 (L), a strong 1 cut-in effect is executed in the display area of the image display device 5. That is, as described above, “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is determined as a cut-in effect to be executed when an operation is performed in the first operation period during super reach, and according to the determination. Since the production control pattern is set, if there is an operation during the first operation period during the super reach, the strong 1 cut-in production is executed. Further, since there is an operation during the first operation period during super reach, an end display MK1 is displayed superimposed on the operation effect icon ST3 corresponding to the operation period.

  The fourth operation period (the second operation period during super reach) out of all four operation periods corresponding to the total number of operations that can be performed four times in the operation effect pattern “SEP-C” following FIG. ) And subsequent scenes are the same as the operation period of up to three times, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a ratio at which a strong cut-in effect is executed. FIG. 42 (A) shows the execution ratio of strong cut-in effects according to the combination of the total remaining number of operations and the total number of possible operations (percentage of execution of strong cut-in effects according to the total remaining number of operations and the total number of possible operations). Show. As described above, the “total number of operations that can be performed” is the number of operation periods set for the entire period in which the operation effect is executed. The “total remaining number of operations” is the number of remaining operation periods after the end of the current operation period. For example, in the case of an operation effect pattern “SEP-B” in which the total number of operations that can be performed is 2 (the operation period set for all periods is 2), the first operation period of all the two operation periods is Since the number of remaining operation periods after the end is one, the total remaining number of operations is one, and the number of remaining operation periods after the end of the second operation period of all two operation periods. Is 0, the total remaining number of operations is 0.

  In the table of FIG. 42A, “-” in a column indicated by a column (total number of remaining operations) and a row (total number of operations allowed) indicates that the combination of the total remaining number of operations and the total number of operations that can be performed. Indicates that it does not exist.

  In the table of FIG. 42A, the row of the total operable number of times “1” corresponds to the operation effect pattern “SEP-A”. When the total number of possible operations is one, the number of remaining operation periods after the end of the first operation period of all one operation period is 0, so the total remaining number of operations is “0”. There are combinations of the total operable number of times “1”, but there are combinations of the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total allowable number of operations “1”, combinations of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total allowable number of operations “1”, A combination of the total remaining operation count “3” and the total operable count “1”, a combination of the total remaining operation count “4” and the total operable count “1”, a total remaining operation count “5” and the total operable count “1” "Does not exist.

  In the table of FIG. 42A, the row of the total operable number of times “2” corresponds to the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”. When the total number of possible operations is two, the number of remaining operation periods after the end of the first operation period of all two operation periods is one, so the total remaining number of operations “0” There are combinations of the total operable number of times “2” and combinations of the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total allowable number of operations “2”, but combinations of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total allowable number of operations “2” A combination of the total remaining operation count “3” and the total operable count “2”, a combination of the total remaining operation count “4” and the total operable count “2”, a total remaining operation count “5” and the total operable count “2” "Does not exist.

  In the table of FIG. 42A, the row of the total operable number of times “4” corresponds to the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. When the total number of possible operations is four, the number of remaining operation periods after the end of the first operation period out of all four operation periods is three, so the total remaining number of operations “0” A combination of the total operable number of times “4”, a combination of the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total allowable number of operations “4”, a combination of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total allowable number of operations “4”, or the total remaining number of operations There are combinations of “3” and the total number of possible operations “4”, but a combination of the total number of remaining operations “4” and the total number of possible operations “4”, the total remaining number of operations “5”, and the total number of possible operations “4”. "Does not exist.

  In the table of FIG. 42A, the row of the total operable number of times “6” corresponds to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When the total number of possible operations is 6, the number of remaining operation periods after the end of the first operation period out of all 6 operation periods is 5, so the total remaining number of operations “0” The combination of the total operable number “6” is also the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total allowable number of operations “6”. The combination of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total allowable number of operations “6” is also the total remaining number of operations. The combination of “3” and the total operable number of times “6” is also the combination of the total remaining number of operations “4” and the total allowable number of operations “6”, or the combination of the total remaining number of operations “5” and the total operable number of times “6”. Exists.

  In the table of FIG. 42A, “value 1 (value 2)” in a column indicated by a column (total number of remaining operations) and a row (total number of possible operations) is the total remaining number of operations and the total operation. The execution ratio (%) of the strong cut-in effect in the possible number of combinations is shown. Specifically, the value 1 outside the parentheses is the execution ratio (%) of the strong 2 cut-in effect. The value 2 in the parenthesis is the ratio at which either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed (the execution ratio (%) of the strong 1 cut-in effect and the execution ratio (%) of the strong 2 cut-in effect) Total).

  First, the row of the total operable number of times “6” will be described. “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “5” and the total number of possible operations “6” is the first operation in all six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution ratio of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, there was an operation in the first operation period (first operation period before reach) out of all six operation periods. In this case, since “J2E (weak 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 100%, the execution rate of the strong 1 cut-in effect and the execution rate of the strong 2 cut-in effect are both 0%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “0 (80)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “4” and the total number of possible operations “6” indicates the second operation in the total six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution ratio of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 80%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, there is an operation in the second operation period (the first operation period in the reach) of all six operation periods. In this case, “J2E (weak 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 20%, and “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 80%. The ratio is 80%, and the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “3” and the total number of possible operations “6” is the third operation in the total six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution rate of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution rate of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 100%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, there is an operation in the third operation period (second operation period in the reach) out of all six operation periods. In this case, since “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 100%, the execution rate of the strong 1 cut-in effect is 100% and the execution rate of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. is there. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total number of possible operations “6” is the fourth operation in the total six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution rate of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution rate of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 100%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, there is an operation during the fourth operation period (the first operation period during super reach) out of all six operation periods. In this case, since “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 100%, the execution rate of the strong 1 cut-in effect is 100% and the execution rate of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. It is. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “50 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total number of possible operations “6” is the fifth operation in the total six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 50%, and the execution ratio of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 100%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, there is an operation in the fifth operation period (the second operation period in the super reach) out of all six operation periods. In this case, “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 50%, and “K2E (strong 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “90 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of possible operations “6” is the sixth operation in the total six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution rate of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 90%, and the execution rate of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 100%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, there is an operation during the sixth operation period (the third operation period during super reach) out of all six operation periods. In this case, “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 10%, and “K2E (strong 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 90%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  The row of the total number of possible operations “4” will be described. “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “3” and the total number of possible operations “4” indicates the first operation in all four operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution ratio of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, there was an operation in the first operation period (first operation period before reach) out of all four operation periods. In this case, “J1E (weak 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 50%, and “J2E (weak 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 50%. Both the ratio and the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect are both 0%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “0 (20)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total number of possible operations “4” indicates the second operation in the four operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution ratio of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 20%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, there is an operation in the second operation period (the first operation period in the reach) of all four operation periods. In this case, “J2E (weak 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 80%, and “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 20%. The ratio is 20%, and the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total number of possible operations “4” is the third operation in the four operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution rate of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution rate of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 100%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, there is an operation in the third operation period (the first operation period in the super reach) among all four operation periods. In this case, since “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 100%, the execution rate of the strong 1 cut-in effect is 100% and the execution rate of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. It is. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “20 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of possible operations “4” is the fourth operation in the four operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 20%, and the execution ratio of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 100%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, there is an operation in the fourth operation period (the second operation period in the super reach) out of all four operation periods. In this case, “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 80%, and “K2E (strong 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 20%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  The row of the total operable count “2” will be described. “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total number of possible operations “2” is the first operation in the two operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution ratio of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”, there was an operation in the first operation period (first operation period before reach) out of all two operation periods. In this case, “J1E (weak 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 90%, and “J2E (weak 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 10%. Both the ratio and the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect are both 0%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of possible operations “2” indicates the second operation in the two operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”. When the operation is performed during the period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution ratio of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. ing. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”, there was an operation in the second operation period (the first operation period in the reach) out of all the two operation periods. In this case, since “J2E (weak 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 100%, the execution rate of the strong 1 cut-in effect and the execution rate of the strong 2 cut-in effect are both 0%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  The row of the total operable count “1” will be described. “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of possible operations “1” is the operation period of the operation effect pattern “SEP-A” (the first operation period during reach). When there is an operation, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and the execution ratio of either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. . As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-A”, “J1E (weak 1 cut-in effect)” is executed at a rate of 100% when there is an operation during the operation period. Therefore, the execution ratio of the strong 1 cut-in effect and the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect are both 0%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  According to FIG. 42A, even if the total remaining number of operations is the same, if the total number of possible operations is different, the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect may be different. For example, when the total remaining number of operations is 0, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0% when the total number of possible operations is 1 or 2, and is 20 when the total number of possible operations is 4. %, 90% when the total possible number of operations is 6. When the total number of remaining operations is 0, the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect (strong 1 cut-in effect or strong 2 cut-in effect) is 0% when the total number of possible operations is 1 or 2 times. When the number of possible operations is 4 or 6, it is 100%. Thereby, interest is improved.

  FIG. 42 (B) shows the execution ratio of strong cut-in effects according to the combination of the total remaining number of operations and the total number of operations (execution ratio of strong cut-in effects according to the total remaining number of operations and the total number of operations). Yes. The “total number of operations” is the number of operations indicating the number of operations in the current operation period for the operation period set for the entire period in which the operation effect is executed.

  For example, in the fourth operation period of all four operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, if there is an operation in any of the first to third operation periods, the current operation period ( Since the operation in the fourth operation period) is the fourth operation, the total number of operations is four, and there were two operations in the first to third operation periods, but there was no operation once. In this case, since the operation in the current operation period (fourth operation period) is the third operation, the total number of operations is 3, and there is an operation in one of the first to third operation periods. If there is no operation twice, the operation in the current operation period (fourth operation period) is the second operation, so the total number of operations is two, and in any of the first to third operation periods If there was no operation, The total number of operations since the operation in the work period (fourth operation period) is the first operation will be once.

  In addition, for example, when there is an operation in any of the first to second operation periods in the third operation period of all four operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, the current operation period Since the operation in the (third operation period) is the third operation, the total number of operations is 3, and there was one operation in the first to second operation periods, but there was no operation once. In this case, since the operation in the current operation period (the third operation period) is the second operation, the total number of operations is 2, and there is no operation in any of the first to second operation periods. Since the operation in the current operation period (third operation period) is the first operation, the total number of operations is one.

  Similarly, for example, when there is an operation in any of the first to fifth operation periods in the sixth operation period of all six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, Since the operation in the operation period (sixth operation period) is the sixth operation, the total number of operations is six. Further, for example, in the third operation period of all six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, there is an operation once in the first to second operation periods. When there is no operation, since the operation in the current operation period (third operation period) is the second operation, the total number of operations is two. Further, for example, in the second operation period of the two operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”, when there is no operation in the first operation period, the current operation period (second operation period) Since the operation in the (period) is the first operation, the total number of operations is one.

  Note that FIG. 42B shows a strong cut according to the combination of the total remaining number of operations and the total number of operations when there is an operation in each operation period (that is, when the number of times of no operation is 0). The execution ratio of the in effect is shown. Therefore, the sum of the total number of operations shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the total number of remaining operations shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B) is the total number of possible operations shown in FIG. 42 (A). It becomes.

  In the column of the total remaining operation count “0” in FIG. 42B, a combination of the total remaining operation count “0” and the total operation count “1”, or the total remaining operation count “0” and the total operation count “2”. Or a total remaining operation count “0” and a total remaining operation count “4” or a total remaining operation count “0” and a total operation count “6”. There is no combination of the operation count “3” or a combination of the total remaining operation count “0” and the total operation count “5”.

  The combination of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of operations “1” corresponds to the operation (first operation) in the current operation period (first operation period) of the operation effect pattern “SEP-A”. As described above, the sum of the total number of operations shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the total number of remaining operations shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B) is shown in FIG. 42 (A). Therefore, when the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 1, the total number of possible operations is 1 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-A”). The combination of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of operations “2” is the current operation period (second operation period) when there is an operation during the first operation period of the operation effect pattern “SEP-B” ) (Second operation). When the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 2, the total number of possible operations is 2 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”). The combination of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of operations “4” is the current operation period when there is an operation in any of the first to third operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. This corresponds to the operation (fourth operation) of (the fourth operation period). When the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 4, the total number of possible operations is 4 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”). The combination of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of operations “6” is the current operation period when there is an operation in any of the first to fifth operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. This corresponds to the operation (sixth operation period) (sixth operation period). When the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 6, the total number of possible operations is 6 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”).

  In the case of the column of the total remaining operation count “1”, a combination of the total remaining operation count “1” and the total operation count “1”, a combination of the total remaining operation count “1” and the total operation count “3”, or the total remaining count. There are combinations of the number of operations “1” and the total number of operations “5”, but the combination of the total number of remaining operations “1” and the total number of operations “2”, the total number of remaining operations “1”, and the total number of operations “4”. Or a combination of the total number of remaining operations “1” and the total number of operations “6” does not exist.

  The combination of the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total number of operations “1” corresponds to the operation (first operation) in the current operation period (first operation period) of the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”. As described above, the sum of the total number of operations shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the total number of remaining operations shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B) is shown in FIG. 42 (A). Therefore, when the total remaining number of operations is 1 and the total number of operations is 1, the total number of possible operations is 2 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-B”). The combination of the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total number of operations “3” is the current operation period when there is an operation in any of the first to second operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. This corresponds to the operation (third operation) of (third operation period). When the total remaining number of operations is 1 and the total number of operations is 3, the total number of possible operations is 4 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”). The combination of the total remaining number of operations “1” and the total number of operations “5” is the current operation period when there is an operation in any of the first to fourth operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. This corresponds to the operation (fifth operation) of (fifth operation period). When the total remaining number of operations is 1 and the total number of operations is 5, the total number of possible operations is 6 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”).

In the column of the total remaining number of operations “2”, there are combinations of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total number of operations “2” and combinations of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total number of operations “4”. But,
Combination of total remaining operation count “2” and total operation count “1”, combination of total remaining operation count “2” and total operation count “3”, or combination of total remaining operation count “2” and total operation count “5” There is no combination of the total number of remaining operations “2” and the total number of operations “6”.

  The combination of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total number of operations “2” is the current operation period (second operation) when there is an operation in the first operation period of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. Period) operation (second operation). As described above, the sum of the total number of operations shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the total number of remaining operations shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B) is shown in FIG. 42 (A). Therefore, when the total remaining number of operations is 2 and the total number of operations is 2, the total number of possible operations is 4 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”). The combination of the total remaining number of operations “2” and the total number of operations “4” is the current operation period when there is an operation in any of the first to third operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. This corresponds to the operation (fourth operation) of (the fourth operation period). When the total remaining number of operations is 2 and the total number of operations is 4, the total number of possible operations is 6 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”).

  In the column of the total remaining number of operations “3”, there are combinations of the total remaining number of operations “3” and the total number of operations “1” and combinations of the total remaining number of operations “3” and the total number of operations “3”. However, the combination of the total remaining operation count “3” and the total operation count “2”, the combination of the total remaining operation count “3” and the total operation count “4”, the total remaining operation count “3” and the total operation count “5”. And the total remaining number of operations “3” and the total number of operations “6” do not exist.

  The combination of the total remaining number of operations “3” and the total number of operations “1” corresponds to the operation (first operation) in the current operation period (first operation period) of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. As described above, the sum of the total number of operations shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the total number of remaining operations shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B) is shown in FIG. 42 (A). Therefore, when the total remaining number of operations is 3 and the total number of operations is 1, the total number of possible operations is 4 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”). The combination of the total remaining number of operations “3” and the total number of operations “3” is the current operation period when there is an operation in any of the first to second operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. This corresponds to the operation (third operation) of (third operation period). When the total remaining number of operations is 3 and the total number of operations is 3, the total number of possible operations is 6 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”).

  In the column of the total remaining number of operations “4”, there is a combination of the total remaining number of operations “4” and the total number of operations “2”, but the total remaining number of operations “4” and the total number of operations “1”. Combination, total remaining operation count “4” and total operation count “3”, total remaining operation count “4”, total operation count “4” combination, total remaining operation count “4”, and total operation count “5” And the total remaining number of operations “4” and the total number of operations “6” do not exist.

  The combination of the total remaining number of operations “4” and the total number of operations “2” is the current operation period (second operation period) when there is an operation during the first operation period of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. ) (Second operation). As described above, the sum of the total number of operations shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the total number of remaining operations shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B) is shown in FIG. 42 (A). Therefore, when the total remaining number of operations is 4 and the total number of operations is 2, the total number of possible operations is 6 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”).

  In the column of the total remaining operation count “5”, there is a combination of the total remaining operation count “5” and the total operation count “1”, but the total remaining operation count “5” and the total operation count “2”. Combination, total number of remaining operations “5” and total number of operations “3”, total remaining number of operations “5”, total number of operations “4”, total number of remaining operations “5”, and total number of operations “5” Or a combination of the total remaining number of operations “5” and the total number of operations “6” does not exist.

  The combination of the total remaining number of operations “5” and the total number of operations “1” corresponds to the operation (first operation) in the current operation period (first operation period) of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. As described above, the sum of the total number of operations shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the total number of remaining operations shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B) is shown in FIG. 42 (A). Therefore, when the total remaining number of operations is 5 and the total number of operations is 1, the total number of possible operations is 6 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”).

  First, the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D” will be described. “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “5” and the total number of operations “1” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining number of operations “5” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (0)” in the combination column of the number of times “6”. “0 (80)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “4” and the total number of operations “2” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining number of operations “4” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (80)” in the combination column of the number of times “6”. “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining operation count “3” and the total operation count “3” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining operation count “3” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (100)” in the combination column of the number of times “6”. “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining operation count “2” and the total operation count “4” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining operation count “2” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (100)” in the combination column of the number of times “6”. “50 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining operation count “1” and the total operation count “5” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining operation count “1” in FIG. This corresponds to “50 (100)” in the combination column of the number of times “6”. “90 (100)” in the combination column of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of operations “6” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining number of operations “0” in FIG. This corresponds to “90 (100)” in the combination column of the number of times “6”.

  The case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C” will be described. “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining operation count “3” and the total operation count “1” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining operation count “3” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (0)” in the combination column of the number of times “4”. “0 (20)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining operation count “2” and the total operation count “2” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining operation count “2” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (20)” in the combination column of the number of times “4”. “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining operation count “1” and the total operation count “3” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining operation count “1” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (100)” in the combination column of the number of times “4”. “20 (100)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining operation count “0” and the total operation count “4” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining operation count “0” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (100)” in the combination column of the number of times “4”.

  The case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-B” will be described. “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining operation count “1” and the total operation count “1” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining operation count “1” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (0)” in the combination column of the number of times “2”. “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining number of operations “0” and the total number of operations “2” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining number of operations “0” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (0)” in the combination column of the number of times “2”.

  The case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-A” will be described. “0 (0)” in the column of the combination of the total remaining operation count “0” and the total operation count “1” in FIG. 42B is the total remaining operation count “0” in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (0)” in the combination column of the number of times “0”.

  According to FIG. 42B, even if the total remaining number of operations is the same, the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect may be different if the total number of operations is different. For example, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect when the total remaining number of operations is 0 is 0% when the total number of operations is 1 or 2, and 20% when the total number of operations is 4. When the total number of operations is 6, it is 90%. When the total remaining number of operations is 0, the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect (strong 1 cut-in effect or strong 2 cut-in effect) is 0% when the total number of operations is 1 or 2, and the total operation When the number of times is 4 or 6, it is 100%. Thereby, interest is improved.

  In the second embodiment, it has been described that the cut-in effect is not executed when there is no operation during the operation period. However, when there is no operation during a certain operation period (operation period A), the operation period A and later Cut-in effect (referred to as cut-in effect B) that has been determined to be executed when there is an operation during the operation period B (referred to as operation period B). It is good also as an aspect (it is called execution aspect A) which replaces with and performs the cut-in effect (it is called cut-in effect A) determined to perform when there exists operation in the operation period A. FIG. Further, instead of the execution mode A, a mode (referred to as execution mode B) in which the cut-in effect B is executed in the operation period B regardless of the presence or absence of the operation in the operation period A may be used.

  In the case of the execution mode A, in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (step S171), an effect corresponding to each cut-in effect associated with the execution order and determined to be executed in each operation period. In addition to setting the control pattern, in the variable display effect process (step S172), if there is an operation during a certain operation period, the cut-in effect to be executed this time may be determined and executed according to the execution order. Further, in the case of execution mode B, in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (step S171), each cut-in effect corresponding to each operation period is determined to be executed in each operation period. In addition to setting an effect control pattern to be performed, in the variable display effect process (step S172), if there is an operation during a certain operation period, a cut-in effect corresponding to the operation period may be executed.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a ratio or the like at which a strong cut-in effect is executed. 43A and 43B show which cut-in effects are executed when an operation is performed in the execution mode A described above. Specifically, FIG. 43A shows that the operation is performed in the operation period up to the fifth operation period (the operation period until the second operation in the super reach) out of the total six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. This shows the relationship between the number of times of occurrence and the cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation during the sixth operation period (the third operation period during super reach). FIG. 43B shows the number of operations in the operation period up to the third operation period (up to the first operation period in super reach) among the four operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. A relationship with a cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation in the fourth operation period (second operation period in super reach) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, when the operation in the operation period up to the fifth operation is 0 (that is, the operation in the current operation period (the sixth operation period) is the first operation), the current operation is performed. In the period, “J2E” is executed at a rate of 100%. That is, the cut-in effect that has been determined to be executed in the first operation period (first operation period before reach) among the six operation periods is executed (see FIG. 38B). Further, when the operation in the operation period up to the fifth operation is one time (that is, the operation in the current operation period (the sixth operation period) is the second operation), “J2E” is 20% in the current operation period. And “K1E” is executed at a rate of 80%. That is, the cut-in effect determined to be executed in the second operation period (the first operation period in the reach) among the six operation periods is executed (see FIG. 38B). Similarly, when the operation in the operation period up to the fifth operation is twice (that is, the operation in the current operation period (the sixth operation period) is the third operation), “K1E” is 100%. Run at a rate. When the operation in the operation period up to the fifth operation is three times (that is, the operation in the current operation period (the sixth operation period) is the fourth operation), “K1E” is executed at a rate of 100%. . When the operation in the operation period up to the fifth operation is four times (that is, the operation in the current operation period (the sixth operation period) is the fifth operation), “K1E” is executed at a rate of 50%. “K2E” is executed at a rate of 50%. If the operation in the operation period up to the fifth operation is five times (that is, the operation in the current operation period (sixth operation period) is the sixth operation), “K1E” is executed at a rate of 10%. “K2E” is executed at a rate of 90%.

  As shown in FIG. 43B, when the operation in the operation period up to the third operation is 0 times (that is, the operation in the current operation period (fourth operation period) is the first operation), the current operation is performed. In the period, “J1E” is executed at a rate of 50%, and “J2E” is executed at a rate of 50%. That is, the cut-in effect that is determined to be executed in the first operation period (first operation period before reach) among the four operation periods is executed (see FIG. 38B). When the operation in the operation period up to the third operation is one time (that is, the operation in the current operation period (fourth operation period) is the second operation), “J2E” is 80% in the current operation period. And “K1E” is executed at a rate of 20%. That is, the cut-in effect determined to be executed in the second operation period (the first operation period in the reach) among the four operation periods is executed (see FIG. 38B). Similarly, when the operation in the operation period up to the third operation is twice (that is, the operation in the current operation period (fourth operation period) is the third operation), “K1E” is 100%. Run at a rate. If the operation in the operation period up to the third operation is three times (that is, the operation in the current operation period (fourth operation period) is the fourth operation), “K1E” is executed at a rate of 80%, “K2E” is executed at a rate of 20%.

  43 (C) and 43 (D) show the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect according to the combination of the total remaining number of operations and the total number of operations in the case of the execution mode A described above. Specifically, FIG. 43C shows the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect for each total operation count in the case of FIG. 43A (total remaining operation count “0”), and FIG. Shows the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect by the total number of operations in the case of FIG. 43B (total number of remaining operations “0”). 43 (C) and 43 (D), even if the total remaining number of operations is the same (and even if the operation effect pattern is the same), if the total number of operations is different, a strong cut-in effect is obtained. The execution ratio may differ.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating another display example of the operation effect icon. In the above description, the example in which the operation effect icons corresponding to the total number of possible operations (the number of operation periods set for the entire period in which the operation effect is executed) is displayed has been described, but each period (before reach, during reach) , During super reach), the number of operation effect icons corresponding to the number of possible operations during each period may be displayed. For example, in the case of the sixth operation period (third operation period during super reach) in the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, the total number of possible operations (as in display example 1 shown in FIG. 44A) Instead of displaying six operation effect icons corresponding to (6 times), as shown in display example 2 shown in FIG. 44 (B), three corresponding to the number of possible operations during super reach (3 times). The operation effect icon may be displayed.

  44A, in the operation effect pattern “SEP-C” in FIGS. 39 to 41, the four operation effect icons for the entire period are the first (first operation period before reach). The six operation effect icons shown in FIG. 44 (A) are displayed from the beginning in the same manner as in FIG. Also, in the display example 2 shown in FIG. 44B, one operation effect icon corresponding to the number of operations that can be performed before reach (one time) is displayed before reach, and the number of operations that can be performed during reach during reach. Two operation effect icons corresponding to (twice) are displayed. That is, the number of operable times (number of possible operations in each period) is notified a plurality of times during one change.

  Perform strong cut-in effects according to the combination of the remaining number of operations in each period and the number of operations that can be performed in each period in relation to displaying the number of operation effect icons corresponding to the number of operations that can be performed in each period. The ratio will be explained. FIG. 44C shows the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect according to the combination of the remaining number of operations during super reach and the number of possible operations during super reach. The “number of remaining operations during super reach” is the number of remaining operation periods during super reach after the end of the current operation period.

  In the table of FIG. 44C, the row of “2” operable times during the super reach corresponds to the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. When the number of possible operations during super reach is two, the number of remaining operation periods after the end of the first operation period of the two operation periods during super reach is one. There are combinations of the remaining number of operations “0” and the number of possible operations during super reach “2”, and the combination of the number of remaining operations “1” during super reach and the number of possible operations “2” during super reach. There is no combination of the remaining operation count “2” during super reach and the operable count “2” during super reach.

  In the table of FIG. 44C, the row of “3” possible operations during super reach corresponds to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When the number of possible operations during super reach is 3, the number of remaining operation periods after the end of the first operation period among the three operation periods during super reach is 2 times. The combination of the remaining number of operations “0” and the number of possible operations during super reach “3” is also the combination of the number of remaining operations “1” during super reach and the number of possible operations “3” during super reach. There is also a combination of the remaining operation count “2” and the possible operation count “3” during super reach.

  First, the row of the operable number of times “3” during super reach will be described. “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “2” during super reach and the number of possible operations “3” during super reach indicates three times during super reach of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When there is an operation in the first operation period in the operation period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed. It shows that the ratio is 100%. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is 100 when there is an operation in the first operation period during super reach. The execution ratio of the strong 1 cut-in effect is 100%, and the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “50 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “1” during super reach and the number of possible operations “3” during super reach is three times during super reach of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When there is an operation in the second operation period of the operation period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 50%, and either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed. It shows that the ratio is 100%. As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, if there is an operation during the second operation period during super reach, “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is 50. % Is executed, and “K2E (strong 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a ratio of 50%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “90 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “0” during super reach and the number of possible operations “3” during super reach indicates three times during super reach of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. When the operation is performed in the third operation period in the operation period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 90%, and either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed. It shows that the ratio is 100%. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, if there is an operation during the third operation period during super reach, “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is 10 % Is executed, and “K2E (strong 2 cut-in effect)” is executed at a ratio of 90%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  The row of the number of possible operations “2” during super reach will be described. “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “1” during super reach and the number of possible operations “2” during super reach indicates two times during super reach of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. When there is an operation in the first operation period in the operation period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%, and either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed. It shows that the ratio is 100%. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is 100 when there is an operation in the first operation period during super reach. The execution ratio of the strong 1 cut-in effect is 100%, and the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 0%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  “20 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “0” during super reach and the number of possible operations “2” during super reach indicates two times during super reach of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. When an operation is performed in the second operation period of the operation period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect is 20%, and either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed. It shows that the ratio is 100%. As shown in FIG. 38B, in the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, “K1E (strong 1 cut-in effect)” is 80 when there is an operation in the second operation period during super reach. % Is executed at a rate of 20%, and “K2E (Strong 2 Cut-in Effect)” is executed at a rate of 20%. Therefore, it becomes the above-mentioned value.

  According to FIG. 44C, even if the remaining number of operations in each period (before reach, during reach, and during super reach) is the same, if the number of operations that can be performed in each period is different, execution of a strong cut-in effect is performed. The ratio may be different.

  In relation to displaying the number of operation effect icons corresponding to the number of operations that can be performed in each period in each period, the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect according to the combination of the remaining number of operations in each period and the number of operations in each period Will be described. FIG. 44D shows the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect according to the combination of the remaining number of operations during super reach and the number of operations during super reach. The “number of operations during super reach” is the number of times that the operation in the current operation period is performed for the operation period set during super reach.

  For example, when there is an operation in the first operation period in the super reach in the second operation period in the two operation periods in the super reach of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”, the current operation period Since the operation in (the second operation period during super reach) is the second operation during super reach, the number of operations during super reach is 2, and there was no operation during the first operation period during super reach. In this case, since the operation during the current operation period (the second operation period during super reach) is the first operation during super reach, the number of operations during super reach is one.

  Further, for example, in the third operation period of the three operation periods in the super reach of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, there is an operation in any of the first to second operation periods in the super reach. In this case, since the operation during the current operation period (the third operation period during the super reach) is the third operation during the super reach, the number of operations during the super reach is three times, If there is an operation in the second operation period but no operation in the first operation period, the operation in the current operation period (the third operation period in the super reach) is the second operation in the super reach. Because it is an operation, the number of operations during Super Reach will be 2, and if there is no operation during any of the first to second operation periods during Super Reach, Operation in the work period (the third operation period in the super reach) is the number of operations in the super reach because it is the first operation in the super reach is 1 times.

  Also, for example, when there is an operation in the first operation period in the super reach in the second operation period in the three operation periods in the super reach of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, the current operation The operation during the period (second operation period during super reach) is the second operation during super reach, so the number of operations during super reach is 2, and there is no operation during the first operation period during super reach. In this case, since the operation during the current operation period (the second operation period during super reach) is the first operation during super reach, the number of operations during super reach is one.

  FIG. 44D shows the number of remaining operations during super reach and during super reach when there is an operation during each operation period during super reach (that is, when the number of times of no operation is 0). The execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect according to the combination of the number of operations is shown. Therefore, the sum of the number of operations during super reach shown in FIG. 44 (D) and the number of remaining operations during super reach shown in FIGS. 44 (C) and 44 (D) is shown in FIG. 44 (C). The number of operations that can be performed during the indicated super reach.

  In the column of the remaining number of operations during super reach “0” in FIG. 44D, the combination of the remaining number of operations “0” during super reach and the number of operations “2” during super reach or the remaining number during super reach There is a combination of the operation count “0” and the super-reach operation count “3”, but there is no combination of the super-reach operation count “0” and the super-reach operation count “1”.

  The combination of the remaining number of operations “0” during super reach and the number of operations “2” during super reach is the operation during the current operation period (second operation period during super reach) of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. (Second operation during super reach). As described above, the sum of the number of operations during super reach shown in FIG. 44 (D) and the number of remaining operations during super reach shown in FIGS. 44 (C) and 44 (D) is shown in FIG. 44 (C), the number of operations that can be performed during super reach. When the remaining number of operations during super reach is 0 and the number of operations during super reach is 2, the number of operations that can be performed during super reach. Is twice (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”). The combination of the remaining number of operations “0” during super reach and the number of operations “3” during super reach is the operation during the current operation period (third operation period during super reach) of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. (3rd operation during super reach). When the remaining number of operations during super reach is 0 and the number of operations during super reach is 3, the number of possible operations during super reach is 3 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”). Become.

  In the case of the column of the remaining number of operations “1” during super reach, the combination of the remaining number of operations “1” during super reach and the number of operations “1” during super reach or the number of remaining operations “1” during super reach and the super There is a combination of the number of operations “2” during reach, but there is no combination of the number of operations remaining “1” during super reach and the number of operations “3” during super reach.

  The combination of the remaining number of operations “1” during super reach and the number of operations “1” during super reach is the operation during the current operation period (first operation period during super reach) of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”. Corresponding to (first operation during super reach). As described above, the sum of the number of operations during super reach shown in FIG. 44 (D) and the number of remaining operations during super reach shown in FIGS. 44 (C) and 44 (D) is shown in FIG. 44 (C), the number of operations that can be performed during super reach. When the number of remaining operations during super reach is one and the number of operations during super reach is one, the number of operations that can be performed during super reach. Is twice (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-C”). The combination of the remaining number of operations “1” during super reach and the number of operations “2” during super reach is the operation during the current operation period (second operation period during super reach) of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. (Second operation during super reach). When the number of remaining operations during super reach is 1 and the number of operations during super reach is 2, the number of possible operations during super reach is 3 (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”). Become.

  In the column of the remaining number of operations during super reach “2”, there is a combination of the remaining number of operations during super reach “2” and the number of operations during super reach “1”, but the remaining number of operations during super reach “ There is no combination of “2” and the number of operations “2” during super reach, and the combination of the number of remaining operations “2” during super reach and the number of operations “3” during super reach.

  The combination of the remaining number of operations “2” during super reach and the number of operations “1” during super reach is the operation during the current operation period (first operation period during super reach) of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”. Corresponding to (first operation during super reach). As described above, the sum of the number of operations during super reach shown in FIG. 44 (D) and the number of remaining operations during super reach shown in FIGS. 44 (C) and 44 (D) is shown in FIG. 44 (C), the number of operations that can be performed during super reach. When the number of remaining operations during super reach is two and the number of operations during super reach is one, the number of operations that can be performed during super reach. Is three times (corresponding to the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”).

  First, the case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D” will be described. “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “2” during super reach and the number of operations “1” during super reach in FIG. 44D represents the remaining number during the super reach in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the number of operations “2” and the number of possible operations “3” during super reach. “50 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “1” during super reach and the number of operations “2” during super reach in FIG. 44D represents the remaining number during the super reach in FIG. This corresponds to “50 (100)” in the column of the combination of the number of operations “1” and the number of possible operations “3” during super reach. “90 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “0” during super reach and the number of operations “3” during super reach in FIG. 44D indicates the remaining number during the super reach in FIG. This corresponds to “90 (100)” in the column of the combination of the number of operations “0” and the number of possible operations “3” during super reach.

  The case of the operation effect pattern “SEP-C” will be described. “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “1” during super reach and the number of operations “1” during super reach in FIG. This corresponds to “0 (100)” in the column of the combination of the number of operations “1” and the number of possible operations “2” during super reach. “20 (100)” in the column of the combination of the remaining number of operations “0” during super reach and the number of operations “2” during super reach in FIG. 44D represents the remaining number during super reach in FIG. This corresponds to “20 (100)” in the column of the combination of the number of operations “0” and the number of possible operations “2” during super reach.

  According to FIG. 44D, even if the number of remaining operations in each period (before reach, during reach, and during super reach) is the same, if the number of operations in each period is different, the execution ratio of the strong cut-in effect is May be different.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating another notification method using an operation effect icon or the like. In the above description, the example using the operation effect icon and the end display MK1 has been described as a method of notifying the number of possible operations, the number of operations (the number of operations), and the number of operations not performed (FIG. 39). To FIG. 41 and FIG. 44), other notification methods may be used. For example, instead of the notification method as shown in FIG. 45 (A), the notification method as shown in FIG. 45 (B) may be used, or the notification method as shown in FIG. 45 (C) may be used. There may be.

  FIG. 45A shows the number of possible operations, the number of operations (number of operations), and the number of operations using the operation effect icon and the end display MK1, as in the notification methods shown in FIGS. This is a notification method for notifying the number of times of no operation. More specifically, the number of operations that can be performed is notified based on the number of operation effect icons displayed first (at the start of the operation effect). Further, an end period MK1 is displayed in association with the operation effect icon (for example, the end period MK1 is superimposed on the operation effect icon as shown in FIG. 45A) to notify the operation period in which the operation has been performed. That is, the number of operations is notified by the number of operation periods in which operations have been performed. In addition, an end period MK1 is displayed instead of the operation effect icon, thereby notifying the operation period when no operation is performed. That is, the number of times when there is no operation is notified by the number of operation periods when there is no operation. In FIG. 45A, the operation period up to the third operation period (the second operation period in the reach) of all six operation periods of the operation effect pattern “SEP-D” is completed and the third operation period is reached. In the operation period, the fact that there was an operation in the first and third operation periods (that is, the number of operations is two times) that there was no operation in the second operation period (that is, no operation was performed) That the number of times is one). Note that the same content is also reported in FIGS. 45B and 45C described later.

  FIG. 45B is a notification method for notifying the number of possible operations, the number of operations (the number of operations), and the number of operations without using the operation effect icon and the operation completion display MK2. More specifically, the number of operable operations is notified by the number of operation effect icons displayed first (or the number of operation effect icons (including the operation effect icons after movement)). In addition, the operation effect icon is moved to another display position (for example, the lower side as shown in FIG. 45B) and the operated display MK2 is displayed in association with the moved operation effect icon (for example, FIG. 45B The operation period during which the operation has been performed is notified by displaying the operation completion display MK2 on the upper part of the operation effect icon after movement as shown in FIG. That is, the number of operations is notified by the number of operation periods in which operations have been performed. Further, the operation period in which there is no operation is notified by moving the operation effect icon to another display position (the operation completion display MK2 is not displayed). That is, the number of times when there is no operation is notified by the number of operation periods when there is no operation.

  FIG. 45C is a notification method for notifying the number of possible operations, the number of operations (the number of operations), and the number of operations not performed using the operation effect icon. More specifically, the number of possible operations is notified by the number of operation effect icons displayed first. In addition, the operation period in which the operation is performed is notified by moving the operation effect icon to another first display position (for example, the position C in FIG. 45C). That is, the number of operations is notified by the number of operation periods in which operations have been performed. In addition, an operation period in which no operation is performed is notified by moving the operation effect icon to another second display position (for example, the position D in FIG. 45C). That is, the number of times when there is no operation is notified by the number of operation periods when there is no operation. The current operation period display MK3 indicates the current operation period. In the example of FIG. 45C, the current operation period display MK3 is displayed above the operation effect icon corresponding to the fourth operation period, indicating that this time is the fourth operation period. Further, the operation effect icon corresponding to the completed third operation period is displayed in a different display mode (for example, gray down, etc., shown by a broken line in the figure).

  45 (B) and 45 (C) illustrate other notification methods such as the total number of possible operations when the operation effect icon notifies the total number of possible operations, etc. FIG. As shown in FIG. 45 (B) and FIG. 45 (C), the other notifications as shown in FIG. 45 (B) and FIG. You may alert | report by the method.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the “remaining number of operations” is a certain number N (that is, the difference N between the “number of operations” and the “total number of operations”), The case where the “operable number” is the first number and the “remaining number of operations” is the above-mentioned number N (that is, the difference between the “number of operable times” and the “total number of times” is the above-mentioned difference N). The strong cut-in effect is executed at a rate different from that in the case where the “number of operable times” is the second number. The “total number of times” is the total number of “number of times of operation (number of times of operation)” and “number of times of no operation” (that is, the number of times the operation period has already ended).

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 42A, the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total operable number is 2, and the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total operable number is 4 times. The strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed at a rate different from that in the case of. According to FIG. 42A, when the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of possible operations is 2, the execution ratio at which either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is When the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of possible operations is 4, the execution ratio at which either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 100%. .

  Further, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 42A, the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of possible operations is 4, and the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of possible operations is 6. The strong 2 cut-in effect is executed at a rate different from that in the case of times. According to FIG. 42A, when the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of possible operations is 4, the execution ratio at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 20%, and the total remaining number of operations Is 0 times and the total number of operations that can be performed is 6 times, the execution rate at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 90%.

  Further, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 44C, the number of remaining operations during super reach is 0, the number of possible operations during super reach is 2, and the number of remaining operations during super reach is 0. The strong 2 cut-in effect is executed at a rate different from that in the case where the number of operations that can be performed during superreach is 3 times. According to FIG. 44 (C), when the remaining number of operations during super reach is zero and the number of possible operations during super reach is two, the execution ratio at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 20%. In addition, when the remaining number of operations during super reach is zero and the number of possible operations during super reach is three, the execution ratio at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 90%.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the “remaining operation count” is a certain number N (that is, the difference N between the “operable count” and the “total count”), When the “number of operations” is the first number, the “remaining number of operations” is the certain number N (that is, the difference between the “number of operations” and the total number of times is the certain difference N), The strong cut-in effect is executed at a different rate from the case where the “number of operations” is the second number. The “total number of times” is the total number of “number of times of operation (number of times of operation)” and “number of times of no operation” as described above (that is, the number of times that the operation period has already ended). ).

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 42B, the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 2, and the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 4. Either a strong 1 cut-in effect or a strong 2 cut-in effect is executed at a different rate. According to FIG. 42B, when the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 2, the execution ratio at which either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 0. When the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 4, the execution ratio at which either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 100%.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 42B, the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 4, and the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 6. A strong 2 cut-in effect is executed at a different rate from a certain case. According to FIG. 42 (B), when the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 4, the execution ratio at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 20%, and the total remaining number of operations is When the number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 6, the execution ratio at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 90%.

  Further, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 44D, the number of remaining operations during super reach is 0 and the number of operations during super reach is 2, and the number of remaining operations during super reach is 0. And the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed at a different rate from the case where the number of operations during the super reach is 3 times. According to FIG. 44D, when the remaining number of operations during super reach is zero and the number of operations during super reach is two, the execution ratio at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 20%. When the remaining number of operations during super reach is zero and the number of operations during super reach is three, the execution ratio at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 90%.

  For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 43A and 43C, the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 1, and the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total Either a strong 1 cut-in effect or a strong 2 cut-in effect is executed at a different rate from when the number of operations is two. According to FIG. 43C, when the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 1, the execution ratio at which either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 0. When the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 2, the execution ratio at which either the strong 1 cut-in effect or the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 80%.

  Further, for example, in the example shown in FIGS. 43A and 43C, the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 5, and the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total The strong 2 cut-in effect is executed at a different rate from the case where the number of operations is 6. According to FIG. 43 (C), when the total remaining number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 5, the execution ratio at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 50%, and the total remaining number of operations is When the number of operations is 0 and the total number of operations is 6, the execution ratio at which the strong 2 cut-in effect is executed is 90%.

  In the second embodiment, when there is no operation during a certain operation period, the cut-in effect is not executed during the operation period, but when there is an operation during the subsequent operation period, the cut-in effect is executed. However (for example, refer to FIG. 43), when there is no operation during a certain operation period, the cut-in effect may not be executed during the subsequent operation period. For example, when there is no operation during a certain operation period, the cut-in effect may not be executed by invalidating the subsequent operation period, and when there is no operation during a certain operation period, the operation effect itself The cut-in effect may not be executed by terminating

  If there is no operation during a certain operation period, even if the cut-in effect is not executed in the subsequent operation period, as shown in FIG. 44A, the total number of possible operations (the operation effect is executed). The number of operation effect icons corresponding to the number of operation periods set for all periods) may be displayed, and as shown in FIG. 44B, each period (before reach, during reach, during super reach) The number of operation effect icons corresponding to the number of possible operations in each period may be displayed.

  If there is no operation during a certain operation period, the number corresponding to the number of operations that can be performed in each period (before reach, during reach, and during super reach) in each aspect (before reach, during reach, and during super reach) in a mode in which cut-in effects are not executed in subsequent operation periods. When the operation effect icon is displayed, the number of operable operations that can be notified may change depending on the operation situation (the presence or absence of an operation). For example, in the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, when there is an operation during the operation period before reach, two times are notified as the number of possible operations during reach during the subsequent reach (two operation effect icons are displayed). However, if there is no operation during the operation period before reach, the operation period is invalidated or the operation effect itself is terminated, so that the number of possible operations is not notified (the operation effect icon is not displayed).

  In addition, in the above-described scene (in a mode in which no cut-in effect is executed in the subsequent operation period when there is no operation in the operation period, the operation effect icons corresponding to the number of operable operations in each period are displayed in each period. In other situations, the number of operable operations that is notified may be changed according to the operation status (the presence or absence of an operation). As an example, in the operation effect pattern “SEP-D”, if there are all three operations in the operation period up to the first three times (up to the second time during reach), the number of possible operations during super reach “ "3 times" (all three operation periods during super reach are all valid), and if there are 2 operations in 3 times, "2 times" is possible during super reach (Predetermined two times out of all three operation periods during Super Reach are valid) When there is one operation out of three times, the number of possible operations during Super Reach “1” is notified ( The number of operations that can be performed during super-reach when one of the three operations has been performed or no operation has been performed. “0 times” is notified (all three operation periods in Super Reach It may be invalid Te).

  Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, although the operation possible frequency | count is alert | reported by the operation effect icon which attached | subjected the number, the aspect which alert | reports the operation possible frequency | count is not limited to this. For example, the number of possible operations may be notified by an icon without a number, or the number of possible operations may be simply notified by a number. That is, the number of possible operations may be displayed with an icon and a number, or either an icon or a number. Similarly, the number of operations may be displayed by an icon and a number, or either an icon or a number. For example, instead of the mode shown in FIGS. 45A to 45C, the number of possible operations, the number of operations (the number of operations), the number of operations not performed, and the remaining number of operations are expressed numerically. It may be displayed. As an example, the display may be as follows: “number of possible operations: 6, number of operations: 2, number of remaining operations: 3.”

  Further, in the second embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 45, it is possible to specify any of the possible number of operations, the number of operations (the number of operations), the remaining number of operations, the total number of operations and the number of operations not performed. (The total number of operations can be specified by displaying the number of operations and the number of operations not being performed, or by displaying the number of operations that can be performed and the number of operations remaining. However, at least one of the number of operations, the number of operations not performed, and the total number of operations may be reported in an identifiable manner.

  In the second embodiment, the period related to the operation effect is divided into “before reach”, “during reach”, and “super reach”, but the method of dividing the period related to the operation effect is not limited to this. . Also, in the case where the number of operation effect icons corresponding to the total number of possible operations is displayed as shown in FIG. 44A (that is, the number corresponding to the number of possible operations in each period as shown in FIG. 44B). When the operation effect icon is not displayed), the period related to the operation effect may not be divided.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the determination ratio of the operation effect pattern is the same between the case where the variation pattern is “PA4-1” and the case where the variation pattern is “PA5-1” (FIG. 36). (A)) The determination ratio of the operation effect pattern may be different between the case where the variation pattern is “PA4-1” and the case where the variation pattern is “PA5-1”. Specifically, compared to the case where the variation pattern is “PA4-1”, the operation effect pattern (for example, SEP-D or SEP-) in which the variation pattern is “PA5-1” has a longer operation period. The rate at which C) is determined may be increased. In the second embodiment, the operation effect pattern determination ratio is the same between the case where the variation pattern is “PB4-1” and the case where the variation pattern is “PB5-1” (FIG. 36). (B)) The determination ratio of the operation effect pattern may be different between the case where the fluctuation pattern is “PB4-1” and the case where the fluctuation pattern is “PB5-1”. Specifically, compared to the case where the variation pattern is “PB4-1”, the operation effect pattern (for example, SEP-D or SEP-) having a longer operation period is greater when the variation pattern is “PB5-1”. The rate at which C) is determined may be increased.

  In the second embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed when there is an operation during the operation period. However, instead of or in addition to the cut-in effect, for example, a serif effect or an effect of displaying a character is executed. May be.

  In the second embodiment, the small symbols displayed in the small symbol display areas 5LK, 5CK, and 5RK are exemplified as those for ensuring the visibility. However, the target for ensuring the visibility is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to ensure visibility such as blinking display indicating that it is changing, information indicating the number of suspensions, and the like.

  In the second embodiment, the operation promotion display 5SS is displayed during the operation period (see FIG. 39 and the like), but the operation promotion display 5SS may not be displayed during the operation period. The same applies to the timer gauge 5T.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The contents of the third embodiment include contents common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the description of the third embodiment, all or part of the description is omitted with respect to the contents common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Also, in the third embodiment, in order to avoid complication, a part (for example, the front view of FIG. 46, the fluctuation category, the fluctuation pattern, and the figure of FIG. 47) is compared with the first embodiment and the second embodiment. 50, etc.), a simple concrete example is used.

  FIG. 46 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the front view of FIG. 46, some members (for example, the movable accessory 17 in FIG. 1) are omitted from the front view of FIG. 1, and some members (for example, the light emitting member in FIG. 1) are omitted. 9U, speakers 8LL and 8LR) are omitted.

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second embodiment), if there is a first special figure reservation memory and a second special figure reservation memory, the second special figure reservation memory is given priority regardless of the winning order. The configuration example (operation example) is described (see FIG. 19), but in the third embodiment, the first special figure reservation memory or the second special figure reservation memory is used in order of winning. This will be described using a configuration example. Further, in relation to the difference in the configuration example of the on-hold digestion, the on-screen display and the active display in the display area of the image display device 5 in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second embodiment) and the third embodiment Are different in display area (see FIGS. 1 and 46).

  As shown in FIG. 46, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an ordinary winning ball device 6A, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, 1 hold display device 25A, 2nd hold display device 25B, normal symbol display device 20, passing gate 41, universal map display device 25C, image display device 5, speaker 8 (speakers 8L, 8R), lamp 9, stick controller 31A The push button 31B is provided.

  Despite having won the normal winning ball device 6A (even though the first start condition is satisfied), the start condition (first start condition) for starting the first special figure game is still satisfied. If not, the variable display corresponding to the winning is stored as a reserved storage. Specifically, the information for executing the variable display (first special figure game) based on the winning is suspended in such a manner that the winning order can be recognized up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) (first special game). Stored as figure hold memory). In spite of the winning of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (despite the second start condition being satisfied), the start condition (second start condition) for starting the second special figure game is still present. When it is not established, the variable display corresponding to the winning is stored as reserved storage. Specifically, information for executing variable display (second special figure game) based on the winning is held in such a manner that the winning order can be recognized up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) (second special game). Stored as figure hold memory). In addition, for example, the winning order in the whole (the following special figure holding memory) that combines the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory separately from the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory is as follows. Information that can be understood may be stored. In the third embodiment, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not distinguished from each other, it is referred to as “special drawing start condition”, and when the first start condition and the second start condition are not distinguished from each other. May be referred to as “special drawing start conditions”. Further, when the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory are not distinguished, they may be simply referred to as “special figure hold memory”.

  Even when the first start condition is satisfied immediately when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure hold memory may be stored although it is instantaneous (although it is immediately digested after storage). . Even when the second start condition is satisfied immediately when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure holding memory may be stored, although it is instantaneous. The same applies to the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

  The special figure start condition is, for example, a case where the number of special figure games held (number of special figure holding memories) is not 0, the special figure game is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state. It is established when there is no state. When the special figure start condition is satisfied (every time the special figure game is started), the special figure holding memory is consumed (the special figure holding memory is reduced), and the special figure game is started. In other words, the special figure hold memory decreases every time the special figure game is started. More specifically, the number of holds of the first special figure game (the number of first special figure hold memory) decreases every time the first special figure game is started (every time the first start condition is satisfied), The number of holds of the 2 special figure game (the number of second special figure hold memory) decreases every time the second special figure game is started (every time the second start condition is satisfied).

  The special figure hold memory is digested in the order of winning regardless of whether it is the first special figure hold memory or the second special figure hold memory. Therefore, for example, when the first special figure hold memory, the first special figure hold memory, the second special figure hold memory, and the first special figure hold memory are stored in this order, the first start condition, the first start condition The second start condition and the first start condition are satisfied in this order. That is, as described above, the special figure start condition is a state where the special figure holding memory number is not 0, the special figure game is not executed, and the special hit game state is not controlled. It is established at a certain time, but more specifically, when the special figure hold memory stored first (the oldest special figure hold memory) is the first special figure hold memory, the first start condition is established, The second start condition is satisfied when the special figure hold memory stored first is the second special figure hold memory.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a holding display area 5H, and a current display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active display area, and an active display area) 5K are arranged. Yes. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative symbols are variably displayed corresponding to the special symbol game. Thereafter, in response to the fixed special symbol being derived and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is derived and displayed. Is done.

  In the hold display area 5H, the number of hold of variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure game is displayed in an identifiable manner. For example, in the hold display area 5H, the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of hold of the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed in such a manner that the winning order (digestion order) is known. Specifically, the decorative symbol hold display corresponding to the first special figure game and the decorative symbol hold indication corresponding to the second special figure game are arranged in the winning order and displayed in the hold display area 5H. In the hold display area 5H, the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is erased (digested) and the hold to be deleted every time the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special game is started. When there is another hold display in addition to the display, the display position of the other hold display is moved (shifted) to the hold display side (the current display area 5K side) from which the display position is deleted. In the current display area 5K, a current display (also referred to as an active display) is displayed.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 has received information relating to variable display that has not yet been started as the hold information (special drawing hold memory) in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol. The display device 4B is memorized in such a manner that it can be known whether or not a prize has been won and the winning order (digestion order). As an example, whether the first special symbol display device 4A is won together with numerical data indicating the random number MR1 or the like in association with the holding numbers (holding numbers “1” to “8”) indicating the overall winning order. Information that can identify whether or not the special symbol display device 4B has been won may be stored.

  The RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 has received information relating to variable display (information indicated by a change category command, a symbol designation command, etc.) that has not yet been started as the hold information in the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol. It memorize | stores in the aspect which knows whether it won to the symbol display apparatus 4B, or a winning order (digestion order). As an example, whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A has been won together with information indicated by the above-described command or the like in association with the buffer numbers (buffer numbers “1” to “8”) indicating the overall winning order. Information that can identify whether or not the special symbol display device 4B has been won may be stored.

Next, an example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.
(Regarding controls related to ordinary games)
When a game ball launched toward the game area passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21 (when the normal start condition is satisfied), the CPU 103 determines a random value MR4 (for determining the normal display result). (Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 at the time of passage) is acquired (extracted). In addition, on the condition that the upper limit number is not exceeded, the general-purpose hold storage (numerical data indicating the acquired random number MR4) corresponding to the general-purpose game based on the passage is stored in the RAM 102. It should be noted that, even if the general chart start condition is satisfied immediately when the general chart start condition is satisfied, the general map hold memory may be stored, although it is instantaneous.

  Thereafter, when the general chart start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 stores the general chart hold memory (numerical data indicating the random number MR4) digested this time and the general map display memory determined this time using the general chart display result determination table. It is determined whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in the general game based on the “normal map” is “per standard”. After the normal symbol variable display result is determined, the normal symbol game 20 starts the normal symbol game. In the usual game, the variable display result is derived and displayed based on the determination result. When the variable display result in the general game is “per normal map”, the electric tulip type accessory of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be in an expanded open state for a predetermined time, and the game ball is set to the second start winning opening. It becomes easy to win.

(Regarding the control related to special game)
When the special figure starting condition is established, the CPU 103 acquires (extracts) a random number value MR1 (numerical data indicating the random value MR1 at the time of passage) and the like for special figure display result determination (determination). Further, on the condition that the upper limit number is not exceeded, special figure holding storage (numerical data indicating the acquired random value MR1 or the like) corresponding to the special figure game based on the passage is stored in the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 can change the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the passage by using the special symbol holding memory (numerical data indicating the random number MR1 etc.) stored this time and the special graph display result determination (determination) table. It is determined whether or not the display result is “big hit”. Further, the CPU 103 determines the variable category of the variable display game based on the passage using the special figure hold storage (numerical data indicating the random number MR3, etc.) stored this time and the variable category determination table. In addition, an effect control command (for example, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, etc.) relating to the start winning prize is output to the effect control board 12 side.

  On the effect control board 12 side, information indicating the effect control command related to the start winning prize (for example, information indicating whether it becomes a “big hit” indicated by the symbol designating command, or information indicating the changing category indicated by the changing category command) Etc.) is stored in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 obtains (extracts) a random number for effect determination (for example, numerical data indicating a random value when the effect control command is input), and the acquired random value and effect determination table. Are used to determine an effect (for example, an effect based on the display mode of the hold display). The determined effect is executed according to the determined content (execution timing, effect mode, etc.). Note that, as described above, the effect determined at the time of starting winning is an example of the pre-reading notice effect of the notice effects. According to the pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to notify or indicate to the player the presence / absence or type of the reach effect, the degree of jackpot expectation, etc. in the variable display before the start of the variable display. .

  Thereafter, when the special figure start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 uses the special figure holding memory (numerical data indicating the random number MR1 and the like) to be digested this time and the special figure display result determination (determination) table. It is determined whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the special symbol hold memory is “big hit”. Further, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern of the variable display game based on the passage using the special figure reservation storage (numerical data indicating the random number MR5, etc.) digested this time and the variation pattern determination table. After determining the special symbol variable display result and the like, the special symbol game is started. When the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled, and the game ball is likely to win a big winning opening. Further, after determining the variable symbol display result of the special symbol (timing for starting the special symbol), the effect control command (for example, variable display result notification command, variable pattern designation command) regarding the variable display start is displayed on the effect control board 12 side. Etc.) is output.

  On the effect control board 12 side, information based on the effect control command at the time of starting the variable display (for example, information indicated by the variable display result notification command (information indicating whether it is “big hit”, etc.) or a variation pattern designation command. Information indicating a variation pattern) is stored in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 obtains (extracts) a random number for effect determination (for example, numerical data indicating a random value when the effect control command is input), and the acquired random value and effect determination table. Are used to determine an effect (for example, a speech effect to be executed during variable display of decorative symbols). The determined effect is executed according to the determined content. As described above, the effect determined at the start of variable display is an example of a notice effect. According to the notice effect, it is possible to notify or suggest to the player the expected degree of jackpot.

  It should be noted that after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state may be different from the normal state. For example, according to the jackpot type determined by the CPU 103 using the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination (determination) and the jackpot type determination (determination) table, the high-probability state (probability change state) after the big-hit gaming state is ended. Alternatively, a high base state (short time state) may be used.

  47 and 48 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a variation category and a variation pattern. In the third embodiment, for the sake of simplification, five types of variation categories (“PA1”, “PA2”, “PA3”, “PB2”, “PB3”) are used as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the variation category “PA1” in the third embodiment is a non-reach (losing) variation category. The variation category “PA1” includes a shortened non-reach (loss) variation pattern “PA1-1” and a non-reach (loss) variation pattern “PA1-2”. The fluctuation category “PB2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. In the fluctuation category “PB2”, a fluctuation pattern “PB2-1” which is a big hit in normal reach A (hereinafter referred to as “normal A”) and a fluctuation pattern “PB2-” which is in a big hit in normal reach B (hereinafter referred to as “normal B”). 2 ”belongs. The variation category “PB3” is a variation category of super reach (big hit). In the fluctuation category “PB3”, a fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” which develops from normal B to super reach A (hereinafter referred to as “super A”) and becomes a big hit, and normal B to super reach B (hereinafter referred to as “super B”). The fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” that develops into a big hit, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-3” that develops from the normal B to the super A and the relief big hit, and the relief big hit that develops from the normal B into the super B The variation pattern “PB3-4” belongs to. Note that the relief jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot notification is made after the notification of the loss is once made. The loss that is once notified before the big hit notification is also called a temporary loss. Therefore, the relief jackpot is also referred to as a jackpot after provisional loss. The other variation categories are also as shown in FIG. 47 (the description is omitted).

  At the time of starting winning a prize, on the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 determines the variation category at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. That is, when the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is determined to be “losing”, the number of special figure holding memory is two or less (the special figure holding memory by the winning is the second or less special figure holding memory). In this case, the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA1” at a determination rate of 79%, determines the variation category “PA2” at a determination rate of 20%, and determines the variation category “PA3” at a determination rate of 1%. To do. For example, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table for losing (special figure holding storage number 2 or less), and each of “PA1”, “PA2”, and “PA3” has the above-described ratio (79 : 20: 1), it is only necessary to assign a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category to each of “PA1”, “PA2”, and “PA3”. For example, when there are 100 updatable values of the random value MR3, there are 79 determination values to be compared with the random value MR3 in the table, “20” in “PA2”, 20 in “PA2”, and “PA3”. It is sufficient if one is assigned. Further, when it is determined that the special symbol variable display result is “losing” and the number of the special symbol holding memory is 3 or more, the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PA1” at a determination ratio of 89%. Then, the variation category “PA2” is determined at a determination rate of 10%, and the variation category “PA3” is determined at a determination rate of 1%. For example, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table for losing (special figure holding storage number 3 or more), and each of “PA1”, “PA2”, and “PA3” has the above-described ratio (89 : 10: 1), it is only necessary to assign a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category to each of “PA1”, “PA2”, and “PA3”. For example, when there are 100 updatable values of the random value MR3, the determination value to be compared with the random value MR3 is 89 in “PA1”, 10 in “PA2”, and “PA3” in the table. It is sufficient if one is assigned. Further, when the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is determined to be “big hit”, the CPU 103 determines the variation category “PB2” with a determination rate of 60% and determines the variation category “PB3” with a determination rate of 40%. To do. For example, the jackpot variable category determination table is stored in the ROM 101, and “PB2” is determined in the table so that “PB2” and “PB3” are determined at the above-mentioned ratio (60:40). And “PB3” need only be assigned a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3. For example, if there are 100 updatable values of the random value MR3, 60 determination values to be compared with the random value MR3 are assigned to “PB2” and 40 “PB3” are assigned to the table. That's fine. As described above, the determination result of the variation category by the CPU 103 is output to the effect control board 12 side by the variation category command at the time of determination (at the time of starting winning).

  At the start of variable display, the CPU 103 on the main board 11 side determines a variation pattern according to the variation category. As an example, when the variation category is “PA3”, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern “PA3-1” at a determination ratio of 70% as illustrated in FIG. 2 ”is determined at a determination rate of 30%. For example, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for PA3 so that “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” are determined at the above-described ratio (70:30). The determination values to be compared with the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern need only be assigned to “PA3-1” and “PA3-2”. For example, when there are 100 updatable values of the random value MR5, the table includes 70 determination values to be compared with the random value MR5, 30 for “PA3-1”, 30 for “PA3-2”, It only has to be assigned. As another example, when the variation category is “PB3”, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern “PB3-1” at a determination rate of 35% as illustrated in FIG. “PB3-2” is determined at a determination ratio of 50%, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-3” is determined at a determination ratio of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern “PB3-4” is determined at a determination ratio of 10%. For example, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for PB3, and each of “PB3-1” to “PB3-4” is determined at the above-mentioned ratio (35: 50: 5: 10). As described above, it is only necessary that each of “PB3-1” to “PB3-4” is assigned a determination value to be compared with the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. For example, when there are 100 updatable values of the random value MR5, the table includes 35 determination values to be compared with the random value MR5, 50 for “PB3-1”, 50 for “PB3-2”, It suffices that five are assigned to “PB3-3” and ten are assigned to “PB3-4”. Note that, as described above, the determination result of the variation pattern by the CPU 103 is output to the effect control board 12 side by the variation pattern designation command at the time of determination (at the start of variable display).

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect pattern such as hold. The effect pattern such as hold shown in FIG. 49 (A) is a pattern of the display mode of hold display and current display. As shown in FIG. 49 (A), for example, in the hold and other effect pattern “HP0”, the display mode of the hold display is white, the display mode of the current display (before reach) is white, and the display mode of the current display (reach) It is an effect pattern such as a hold, in which (after) is white. On the other hand, the on-hold effect pattern “HP5” has the on-hold display mode white, the on-current display mode (before reach) in yellow, and the on-time display mode (after reach) in red. It is. In addition, the on-hold display pattern “HP8” has the display mode of the hold display in red, the display mode of the current display (before reach) in red, and the display mode of the current display (after reach) in rainbow color. It is a pattern. Other effect patterns such as holding are also as shown in FIG. 49A (description omitted).

  If the “hold display display mode” shown in FIG. 49A is white (“HP0”, “HP1”, “HP2”, “HP4” or “HP5”) In this case, regardless of the number of holds, the white display is additionally displayed in the hold display area 5H and is digested in white. When the “display mode of the hold display” shown in FIG. 49A is yellow (when it is determined to be “HP3” or “HP6”), the second hold (2 before digestion) ) In the case of the above, it is additionally displayed in the hold display area 5H in white, and when shifting to the first hold (one previous digest), it turns yellow and is digested in yellow. In some cases, yellow is additionally displayed in the hold display area 5H and is digested in yellow. When the “display mode of the hold display” shown in FIG. 49A is red (when it is determined to be “HP7” or “HP8”), the second hold (two before digestion) ) In the case of the above, it is additionally displayed in the hold display area 5H in white, and when shifting to the first hold (one previous digest), it changes to red and is digested in red, and the first hold In some cases, red is additionally displayed in the hold display area 5H and digested in red.

  At the time of starting winning a prize, the CPU 120 for effect control on the effect control board 12 side determines an effect pattern such as hold at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 49 (B), for example. That is, when the variation category indicated by the variation category command is either “PA2” or “PB2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern “HP0” such as the hold at a determination rate of 40%, Reservation etc. production pattern “HP1” is decided at 30% decision rate, hold etc. production pattern “HP2” is decided at 20% decision proportion, hold etc. production pattern “HP3” is decided at 10% decision rate. . For example, the ROM 121 stores an effect pattern determination table such as a hold for PA2 (PB2) (one of the effect determination tables), and each of “HP0” to “HP3” is stored in the table in the above ratio. As determined at (40: 30: 20: 10), each of “HP0” to “HP3” is compared with a random number value for determining the effect pattern such as holding (one of the random values for determining the effect). It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned. For example, when there are 100 updatable values of the random number value for determining an effect pattern such as holding, the table has 40 determination values to be compared with the random number value in “HP0” and 30 in “HP1”. It is sufficient that 20 are allocated to “HP2” and 10 are allocated to “HP3”.

  Further, when the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PA3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect pattern “HP1” such as a hold at a determination ratio of 10%, and an effect pattern “HP2” such as a hold. Is determined at a determination ratio of 15%, the retention pattern “HP3” is determined at a determination ratio of 20%, the retention pattern “HP4” is determined at a determination ratio of 20%, and the retention pattern “HP5” is determined. ”Is determined at a determination rate of 15%, the on-holding effect pattern“ HP6 ”is determined at a determining rate of 10%, and the on-holding effect pattern“ HP7 ”is determined at a determination rate of 10%. For example, the ROM 121 stores an effect pattern determination table for PA3, etc., and each of “HP1” to “HP7” has the above-described ratio (10: 15: 20: 20: 15: 10: As determined in 10), each of “HP1” to “HP7” only needs to be assigned a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the effect pattern such as the hold. For example, when there are 100 updatable values of the random number value for determining the effect pattern such as holding, the table has 10 determination values to be compared with the random number value in “HP1” and 15 in “HP2”. 20, “HP3”, 20 “HP4”, 15 “HP5”, 10 “HP6”, 10 “HP7” may be allocated.

  When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PB3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern “HP1” for holding, etc. at a determination ratio of 5%, and the effect pattern “HP2” for holding, etc. Is determined at a determination ratio of 5%, the retention pattern “HP3” is determined at a determination ratio of 5%, the retention pattern “HP4” is determined at a determination ratio of 20%, and the retention pattern “HP5” is determined. ”Is determined at a determination ratio of 20%, the retention pattern“ HP6 ”is determined at a determination ratio of 20%, and the reservation pattern“ HP7 ”is determined at a determination ratio of 20%. HP8 "is determined with a determination rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 121 stores an effect pattern determination table for holding such as PB3, and each of “HP1” to “HP8” is stored in the table in the ratio (5: 5: 5: 20: 20: 20: As determined in 20: 5), it is only necessary to assign a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining an effect pattern such as a hold to each of “HP1” to “HP8”. For example, when there are 100 updatable values of the random number value for determining the effect pattern such as holding, the table has 5 determination values to be compared with the random number value in “HP1” and 5 in “HP2”. 5 for "HP3", 20 for "HP4", 20 for "HP5", 20 for "HP6", 20 for "HP7", 5 for "HP8" . When the variation category indicated by the variation category command is “PA1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect pattern “HP0” such as a hold at a determination rate of 100%.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect pattern such as hold, information indicated by the determined effect pattern such as hold (display mode for hold display, display mode for current display (before reach)) The display mode of the current display (after reach) is stored in the RAM 122 in such a manner that it can be identified which hold display or the like (hold information or the like) is related (for example, in association with the buffer number).

  According to FIGS. 49A and 49B, the big hit expectation degree is rainbow color> red> yellow> white.

  FIG. 49C shows the display mode of the current display (after provisional loss). The display mode of the current display (after provisional loss) is a content that the display mode of the current display is changed from white → yellow → red → rainbow after the temporary loss. As described above, the production control CPU 120 determines that the production pattern such as the hold is one of “HP0” to “HP8” based on the variation category indicated by the variation category command at the time of starting winning, but starts variable display. Sometimes when the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command output from the main board 11 is either “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” corresponding to the relief jackpot, an effect such as holding determined at the time of starting winning The current display is displayed in accordance with the display mode by pattern (before reach, after reach) and the display mode (after provisional loss) shown in FIG. When the variation pattern is neither “PB3-3” nor “PB3-4”, the current display is displayed according to the display mode by the effect pattern such as the hold determined at the time of starting winning.

  For example, when “HP5” is determined based on the fluctuation category “PB3” at the time of starting winning, the display mode of the hold display is white, the display mode of the current display (before reach) is yellow, and the display mode of the current display Information indicating that (after reach) is red is stored in the RAM 122. If the variation pattern at the start of variable display is either “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”, In addition to the display mode stored at the time of starting winning, the current display is displayed by the display mode shown in the display mode of the current display (after provisional loss). In other words, if “HP5” is determined at the start winning prize and the variation pattern at the start of variable display is either “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”, the current display is displayed before the reach. Yellow, red after reach, white → yellow → red → rainbow after temporary loss.

  Also, for example, when “HP8” is determined based on the variation category “PB3” at the start winning prize, the display mode of the hold display is red, the display mode of the current display (before reach) is red, and the display of the current display Information indicating that the mode (after reach) is rainbow is stored in the RAM 122, but the variation pattern at the start of variable display is either “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” Displays the current display according to the display mode shown after the temporary display in addition to the display mode stored at the time of starting winning. That is, when “HP8” is determined at the time of starting winning and the variation pattern at the start of variable display is either “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”, the current display is displayed before the reach. Red, iridescent after reach, and white → yellow → red → rainbow after temporary loss.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) executed by the effect control CPU 120 at the start of variable display (for example, the pending digest process in step S530). The effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) and determines whether or not the hold information (information indicated by the variable category command, the symbol designation command, or the like) is stored. When the hold information is stored, the variable display start setting process is started. In addition, the hold information is stored in the RAM 122 at the time of starting winning, and the effect pattern such as the hold is determined by the effect control CPU 120, and the contents determined by the effect pattern such as the hold (display mode of hold display, display mode of current display (before reach) Since the display mode of the current display (after reach) is stored in the RAM 122, when the hold information is stored in the RAM 122, the determination content corresponding to each hold information is also stored in the RAM 122. become. That is, when the variable display start setting process of FIG. 50 is executed, the RAM 122 stores hold information (information indicated by a change category command, a symbol designating command, etc.) and contents determined by an effect pattern such as hold. Will be.

  50, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command is “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” (step S1). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display to be started is a relief jackpot. When it is neither “PB3-3” nor “PB3-4” (step S1; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content at the time of starting winning as the display mode of the current display (step S2). Then, the flowchart of FIG. 50 ends.

  In the process of step S2, for example, when the on-hold effect pattern “HP5” is determined (specifically, the on-hold effect pattern “HP5” is based on the variation category “PA3” or “PB3” at the start winning prize). Is determined (see FIG. 49B), and at the start of variable display, one of the variation patterns “PA3-1”, “PA3-2”, “PB3-1”, and “PB3-2” is determined. In this case, as the display mode of the current display, information for changing to yellow before reaching and red after reaching is set. More specifically, the hold display (the display mode before erasure is white according to “HP5”) displayed on the left end of the start winning memory display area 5 is erased, and the current display (“HP5” is displayed in the current display area K). The display control data included in the set effect control pattern is designated, while setting the effect control pattern that displays yellow in the display mode before reach and red in the display mode after reach). By transmitting a display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the white hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning storage display area 5 is erased, and the yellow current display is displayed in the current display area. K is displayed. The display mode of the current display changes from yellow to red when reaching reach.

  Further, for example, when the start etc. effect pattern “HP8” is determined at the time of starting winning (specifically, the effect pattern “HP8” such as hold is determined based on the variation category “PB3” at the time of starting winning a prize (FIG. 49 ( B)) and when the variable pattern “PB3-1” or “PB3-2” is determined at the start of variable display), the display mode of the current display is red before reach and after reach Sets information to make it iridescent. More specifically, the hold display (the display mode before erasure is red according to “HP8”) displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5 is erased, and the current display (“HP8” is displayed in the current display area K). The display control data included in the set effect control pattern is designated as the effect control pattern that displays red before the reach and the rainbow color after the reach). The display control command to be transmitted is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, so that the red hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5 is deleted, and the red current display is displayed this time. Display in area K. The display mode of the current display changes from red to rainbow when reaching reach.

  On the other hand, when it is either “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” (step S1; YES), the presentation control CPU 120 uses the display contents of the current display as a relief big hit for the contents determined at the start winning prize. A set with added contents is set (step S3). Then, the flowchart of FIG. 50 ends.

  In the process of step S3, for example, when the effect pattern “HP5” for holding is determined at the time of starting winning (specifically, the effect pattern “HP5” for holding is determined based on the variation category “PB3” at the time of starting winning). (See FIG. 49B), and when the variable pattern “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” is determined at the start of variable display), the display mode of the current display is Information is set to yellow, red after reach, and white → yellow → red → rainbow after temporary loss. More specifically, the hold display (the display mode before erasure is white according to “HP5”) displayed on the left end of the start winning memory display area 5 is erased, and the current display (“HP5” is displayed in the current display area K). The display mode before reach is yellow, the display mode after reach is red, and the display mode after temporary loss (during rescue) is white → yellow → red → rainbow) The display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and is displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5 The displayed white hold display is erased, and the yellow current display is displayed in the current display area K. Note that the display mode of the current display changes from yellow to red when reaching reach, and further changes from white to yellow to red to rainbow after temporary loss.

  Further, for example, when the start and other effects pattern “HP8” is determined (specifically, the start and other effects pattern “HP8” is determined based on the variation category “PB3” (FIG. 49 ( B))), and if the variation pattern “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” is determined at the start of variable display), or “HP8” is determined at the start winning prize, this time display As the display mode, information is set to red before reach, to rainbow after reach, and to white → yellow → red → rainbow after temporary loss. More specifically, the hold display (the display mode before erasure is red according to “HP8”) displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5 is erased, and the current display (“HP8” is displayed in the current display area K). The display control data included in the set effect control pattern is designated as the effect control pattern that displays red before the reach and the rainbow color after the reach). The display control command to be transmitted is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, so that the red hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5 is deleted, and the red current display is displayed this time. Display in area K. Note that the display mode of the current display changes from red to rainbow when reaching reach, and further changes from white to yellow to red to rainbow after temporary loss.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a display example in the image display device. In FIG. 51, regarding the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the current display, white is indicated by a circle, yellow by a square, red by a double circle, and a rainbow color by a star. Further, at the time of winning the hold display HH1 shown in FIG. 51A, “PB3 (super reach (big hit))” is determined as the variable display variable category corresponding to the hold display HH1, and the hold corresponding to the hold display HH1. It is assumed that “HP5” is determined as the equal performance pattern.

  FIG. 51A shows a scene in which a fixed decorative pattern (“4”, “1”, “3”) that is not a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the variable display corresponding to the current display KH0 displayed in the current display area 5K. Represents. The current display KH0 is displayed in the hold display area 5H as the hold display HH0 (not shown) in the previous variable display (not shown) as described in parentheses as “original HH0”. Further, in FIG. 51A, the hold display HH1 displayed in the hold display area 5H is a hold display to be digested next. Since the display mode of the hold display is white in the effect pattern “HP5” such as the hold, the display mode of the hold display HH1 is white (circle) as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 51 (B) is a scene following FIG. 51 (A), and shows a scene where variable display corresponding to the current display KH1 displayed in the current display area 5K is started. The current display KH1 is a current display corresponding to the hold display HH1 displayed in the hold display area 5H in FIG. In addition, although the code | symbol was abbreviate | omitted, this display of FIG.51 (C)-FIG.51 (L) is also the same. Since the display mode before reach is yellow in the production pattern “HP5” such as hold, the display mode of the current display KH1 is yellow (square) as shown in FIG.

  When the variable display of FIG. 51B is started (when the hold display HH1 is consumed), “PB3-3 (normal) is displayed as the variable display variation pattern corresponding to the hold display HH1 (current display KH1). It is assumed that “Relief jackpot from B to Super A” is determined.

  FIG. 51C is a scene following FIG. 51B, and shows a scene immediately before the left symbol “7” and the right symbol “7” are reached. FIG. 51 (D) is a scene following FIG. 51 (C) and represents a scene in which the reach state of “7” is reached. Since the display mode after the reach in the on-holding effect pattern “HP5” is red, as shown in FIG. 51D, the display mode of the current display KH1 is red (double circle).

  FIG. 51 (E) is a scene following FIG. 51 (D), and shows a scene developed into super reach. In FIG. 51E, the decorative design is enlarged and the background image is switched from the normal background image (the background image up to FIG. 51D) to the special background image (the cherry pattern background image in the drawing). The enlarged display of the decorative pattern and the special background image allow the player to recognize that he is in super reach.

  FIG. 51 (F) is a scene following FIG. 51 (E), and as a temporary loss (decorative display of decorative symbols) by a variation pattern “PB3-3 (relief big hit developed from normal B to super A)”. , Represents a scene in which decorative symbols (“7”, “6”, “7”) that are not jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed. The display mode of the temporary stop display is different from the display mode of the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol). That is, the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol is completely stopped, but is not completely stopped in the display mode of the temporary stop display (not shown in FIG. 51F, but slightly vibrates, for example). In the temporary stop display, at least one of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may not be completely stopped and displayed (for example, all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may not be completely stopped and displayed. Then, it is not necessary to completely stop and display only the middle symbols to be variably displayed again). 51 (G) to 51 (J) are also temporary stop displays (the illustration of the state of slight vibration, etc. is omitted as in FIG. 51 (F)).

  In addition, the display mode shown in FIG. 51F (the display mode of the temporary losing (decorative display of decorative symbols) by the variation pattern “PB3-3 (relief big hit developed from normal B to super A))”, The display pattern of the stop display of the confirmed decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA3-1 (development from normal B to super A)” is different from whether or not the decorative pattern is completely stopped (the latter The stop display of the fixed decorative design is completely stopped, whereas the former temporary stop display is not completely stopped. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to easily distinguish between temporary losing and the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol, and it is difficult to easily recognize that the display in FIG. 51F is temporary losing. Thereby, it is possible to give a surprise to the big hit later. For some players (for example, a player who is familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1, a careful player, etc.), it may be possible to distinguish between the temporary losing and the stop display of the confirmed decorative pattern relatively easily. Thereby, a sense of superiority can be given to some players.

  FIG. 51 (G) is a scene following FIG. 51 (F), in which the enlarged display of the decorative design is canceled (the decorative design returns to the size of the variable display start), and the background image changes from the special background image to the normal background image. It represents a scene that was switched to. Since the first display mode after the temporary loss is white (see FIG. 49C), as shown in FIG. 51G, the current display KH1 is white (circle). Note that the display mode illustrated in FIG. 51G (the display mode subsequent to FIG. 51H) and the display mode illustrated in FIG. 51A (the display mode before the next change starts) Except for the difference of whether or not the decorative symbols are completely stopped and displayed, they are the same or substantially the same. Thereby, it is possible to give a surprise to the big hit later. For some of the above players, the display mode shown in FIG. 51 (G) and the display mode shown in FIG. 51 (A) may be distinguished relatively easily. Thereby, a sense of superiority can be given to some players.

  FIG. 51H shows a scene following FIG. FIG. 51 (H) again shows a scene in which the decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped are displayed in an enlarged manner. FIG. 51I shows a scene following FIG. Since the second display mode after provisional loss is yellow (see FIG. 49C), the current display KH1 is yellow (square) in FIG. 51I. FIG. 51 (J) shows a scene following FIG. 51 (I). Since the third display mode after provisional loss is red (see FIG. 49C), the current display KH1 is red (double circle) in FIG. 51J. FIG. 51 (K) shows a scene following FIG. 51 (J). In FIG. 51 (K), the middle symbol variable display is started again. Further, the fourth display mode after provisional loss is a rainbow color (see FIG. 49C), and in FIG. 51K, the current display KH1 is a rainbow color (star). FIG. 51 (L) shows a scene in which the confirmed decorative symbols (“7”, “7”, “7”) that are jackpot combinations are stopped and displayed.

  In the display operation example of FIG. 51, the enlarged display of the decorative design is once canceled after the temporary loss (see FIG. 51G), but the enlarged display of the decorative design need not be canceled once after the temporary loss. . For example, instead of changing from FIG. 51 (F) → FIG. 51 (G) → FIG. 51 (H), it may change from FIG. 51 (F) → FIG. 51 (H). Further, in the display operation example of FIG. 51, after temporarily dismissing the enlarged display of the decorative pattern after temporary loss, the enlarged display is displayed again (see FIGS. 51 (G) and 51 (H)). Once the enlarged display is canceled, the enlarged display may not be displayed again.

  Further, in the display operation example of FIG. 51, after the background image is temporarily switched from the special background image to the normal background image after temporary loss, the special background image is not switched again (FIGS. 51G and 51H). For example, after the temporary loss, the background image may be switched from the special background image to the normal background image, and then the background image may be switched from the normal background image to the special background image again.

  Note that when the current display changes after temporary loss, it may be suggested that the current display changes. For example, an effect of illuminating the current display with a spotlight may be executed before the current display changes.

  In addition, according to the display operation example of FIG. 51, when the display pattern such as the hold is “HP8” and the variation pattern is “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”, the current display is It changes to rainbow after reach and changes after temporary loss (white → yellow → red → rainbow), but if it becomes rainbow after reach, change after temporary loss may not be performed . Specifically, for example, when the display pattern such as hold is “HP8” and the variation pattern is “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”, the display mode after reach is rainbow Instead of this, red may be set (that is, the current display is red before reach, red after reach, white → yellow → red → rainbow color after temporary loss).

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit gaming state). Specific display means (for example, current display area 5K, etc.) or a current display area that displays a specific display (for example, current display) that suggests the degree of expectation controlled by the state (for example, the big hit expected degree). An effect control CPU 120 for displaying the current display on 5K, a display control unit 123, and the like, and a notification means for notifying whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state (for example, a confirmed decorative symbol or the like. CPU 120 for display control, display control unit 123, etc.), and controlled to the advantageous state in one variable display execution period (such as the period shown in FIGS. 51B to 51L). The display state of the specific display is changed after the predetermined notification (for example, notification of temporary loss by a decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 51F) is performed (for example, FIG. 51 (H) to FIG. 51). As shown in (K), white (circle) → yellow (square) → red (double circle) → rainbow color (star) and the display mode of the current display changes) to specify that it is controlled to the advantageous state Notification (for example, notification of jackpot with a confirmed decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 51L) is performed.

  In the third embodiment, the display mode of the current display is less likely to change after provisional loss notification than before reach. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

  According to FIG. 49 (A), the display changes this time at the timing before reach when the effect pattern such as hold is “HP2” or “HP5” (the display mode is different from the hold display). . Here, attention is paid only when the effect pattern such as holding is “HP5”. According to FIG. 49 (B), the proportion of the effect pattern such as holding is determined to be “HP5” is 15% when the variation category is “PA3” and 20% when the variation category is “PB3”. It is. Further, attention is paid only when the variation category is “PB3”. According to FIG. 48A, the rate at which the variation category is determined to be “PB3” is 40% when the jackpot is reached. Therefore, the rate at which the variation category is determined to be “PB3” and the effect pattern such as holding is determined to be “HP5” is 8% (40% × 20%). In consideration of the ratio at which the variation category is determined to be “PA3” when the loss occurs, and the performance pattern such as the hold pattern is determined to be “HP5”, and the ratio that the display pattern such as the hold pattern is determined to be “HP2”. The ratio of the display change this time before the reach is over 8%. On the other hand, according to FIG. 47 and FIG. 50, when the fluctuation pattern is “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”, the current display changes at the timing after the provisional loss notification. According to FIG. 48C, the rate at which the variation pattern is determined to be “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” is 15% (5% + 10%) when the variation category is “PB3”. According to FIG. 47A, since the rate at which the variation category is determined to be “PB3” is 40% of the big hit, the variation pattern is “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”. The ratio determined as either of these is 6% (40% × 15%). That is, the rate at which the current display changes at the timing after the provisional loss notification is 6%. Therefore, the display mode of the current display is less likely to change after provisional loss notification than before reach.

  In the third embodiment, the display mode of the current display is less likely to change after provisional loss notification than after reach. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

  According to FIG. 49 (A), the current display changes at the timing after reach when the effect pattern for holding is “HP1”, “HP4”, “HP5”, “HP6”, or “HP8”. . As described above, the rate at which the variation category is determined as “PB3” and the effect pattern such as hold is determined as “HP5” is 8%. The rate at which the variation category is determined to be “PA3” when the loss occurs and “HP5” is determined as the effect pattern for holding, etc. Considering the ratio determined as “HP8”, the ratio of the current display change at the timing after reach is over 8%. On the other hand, as described above, the rate at which the current display changes at the timing after the provisional loss notification is 6%. Therefore, the display mode of the current display is less likely to change after provisional loss notification than after reach.

  Further, in the third embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 50, the display mode of the current display changes after the provisional loss notification is made for the variation pattern “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” that is a big hit. Therefore, if the display mode of the current display changes after the notification of loss has been performed, it is a big hit. Therefore, even if the display mode of the current display changes after notification of temporary loss, it will not be lost, and will always be a big hit. The discouragement caused by can be prevented from being given to the player. As shown in FIG. 51, the current display changes up to rainbow after temporary loss, but it does not have to change up to rainbow. That is, when the display mode of the current display changes after the loss notification is performed, a big hit may be made regardless of the display mode after the change.

  In the third embodiment, in the case where the “display mode of the hold display” shown in FIG. 49A is yellow or red, the display of the hold display corresponding to the number of the hold is the hold. Although the mode has been described (for example, when the “display mode of the hold display” is red, when it is 2nd or more on hold, when it is additionally displayed in the hold display area 5H in white and shifted to the 1st hold, The change pattern of the hold display is not limited to that described with reference to FIG. 5A. For example, when the “display mode of the hold display” is red, when the hold is 3rd or more, it is additionally displayed in the hold display area 5H in white, and changes to yellow when shifting to the 2nd hold, When shifting to the first hold, it may be changed to red to be digested in red, or may be displayed in red in the hold display area 5H in red regardless of the number of holds and digested in red. It may be.

  In the third embodiment, the current display changes so that the big hit expectation level is increased step by step after provisional loss (although it changes from white to yellow to red to rainbow), for example, The current display may change from white to yellow to rainbow after temporary loss, or from white to red to rainbow.

  In the third embodiment, the current display changes from white after temporary loss regardless of the display mode after reach (display mode at the time of temporary loss). For example, the current display is changed to the display mode after reach. Regardless of the temporary loss, the color may change from yellow (yellow → red → rainbow), or after the temporary loss, the color may change from red (red → rainbow) regardless of the display mode after reach. Moreover, this time display may change according to the display mode after reach. For example, the display mode after reach may be changed (for example, when the display mode after reach is yellow, yellow → red → rainbow color, etc.), and the jackpot expectation is 1 than the display mode after reach. The display mode may be changed from a lower level (for example, when the display mode after reach is yellow, white → yellow → red → rainbow color, etc.).

  In the third embodiment, after the temporary loss, the current display changes to the display mode (rainbow color) with the highest expectation level for jackpots and notifies the jackpot, but the display changes to the display mode with the highest expectation level for jackpots. The big hit may be notified without it. As an example, after a temporary loss, the jackpot may be notified by changing from white to yellow to red.

  In the third embodiment, when the current display changes after provisional loss, a big hit is always made. However, when the current display changes after temporary loss, there may be a case where the big hit or no big hit occurs. .

  In the third embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is three colors of white, yellow, and red, but may be two colors, four colors, or more. In the third embodiment, the display mode of the current display is four colors of white, yellow, red, and rainbow colors, but may be two colors, three colors, five colors or more. Moreover, in 3rd Embodiment, although the thing from which a color differs was shown as a display aspect of a hold display (this display is also the same), a size, a pattern, and a shape may differ.

  In the third embodiment, the current display can be changed at most once at the timing before reach, but may be changed at least twice at the timing before reach. The same applies to the timing after reach.

  In the third embodiment, the current display can be changed at a timing before reach, after reach, and after temporary loss (see FIG. 49), but the current display may be changed at other timing. For example, a pseudo-variation pattern is provided in which a temporary stop is performed one or more times in addition to the temporary stop of temporary loss until the final stop symbol is stopped, and the current display is displayed before and after each temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous. You may change in timing.

  In the third embodiment, the display mode of the current display (before reach, after reach) is determined at the time of starting winning, but the display mode (before reach, after reach) of the current display is determined at another timing. May be. For example, the display mode of the current display (before reaching or after reaching) may be determined based on the variation pattern at the start of variable display.

  In the third embodiment, the display mode of the current display (before reach, after reach) is determined at the time of starting winning, but the display mode (before reach, after reach) of the current display is determined at another timing. May be. For example, the display mode of the current display (before reaching or after reaching) may be determined based on the variation pattern at the start of variable display.

  In the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a rescue jackpot by determining the variation pattern (that is, if the variation pattern is determined, whether or not to make a rescue jackpot) Whether or not to make a rescue jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern may be determined by the effect control board 12 (may be the main board 11) (that is, the relief jackpot is based on the fluctuation pattern separately from the fluctuation pattern). Or not). Specifically, the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, and when the variation pattern to be the big hit is determined, the random number value for determining whether or not to make the rescue big hit is further used. It may be determined whether or not to make a rescue jackpot. In the aspect of determining whether or not to make a rescue jackpot based on the fluctuation pattern, when the fluctuation pattern to be a big hit is determined, and when it is further decided to make the relief jackpot, the relief jackpot is determined within the fluctuation time of the determined fluctuation pattern. In order to ensure the execution time of the relief jackpot, it will be executed (although the confirmed decorative symbol that does not become the jackpot combination will be temporarily stopped before the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed) The execution time of the production or the like may be reduced (or the notice production or the like is not executed), or the number of pseudo-continuations may be reduced (or the pseudo-continuous production is not executed).

  In the third embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is determined on the effect control board 12 side. However, the display mode of the hold display is determined on the main board 11 side, and for example, the effect control is performed on the effect control board 12 side. It may be output by command. The same applies to the display mode of the current display.

  Moreover, in 3rd Embodiment, although it demonstrated using the structural example digested in order of winning regardless of whether it is 1st special figure reservation memory or 2nd special figure reservation memory, 1st Embodiment and 1st Similarly to the second embodiment, when there is the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, the second special figure reservation memory may be preferentially digested regardless of the winning order.

  In the third embodiment, when the second special figure holding memory is preferentially digested, the decorative symbol holding display corresponding to the first special graphic game and the decorative graphic corresponding to the second special graphic game are displayed. The number of on-hold displays corresponding to the number of on-holds may be displayed in such a manner that the order of winning is distinguished from the on-hold display. For example, as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, and the first start prize is displayed. In the memory display area 5HL, the decorative display corresponding to the first special figure game is displayed in a manner so that the winning order can be understood, and in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, the winning order is known. You may display the hold display of the decorative design corresponding to 2 special figure games. In addition, in the structure which digests in order of winning regardless of whether it is the 1st special figure reservation memory or the 2nd special figure reservation memory, the hold display of the decorative design corresponding to the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game It may be displayed separately from the hold display of the decorative pattern corresponding to.

  In the third embodiment, when the second special figure reservation memory is preferentially digested, one of the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory (for example, the first special figure reservation memory). In this case, the current display may be changed when a relief jackpot is made in one special figure storage. For example, when the variation pattern “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” is determined in the first special figure game, the process of step S3 in FIG. 49C, but when the variation pattern “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” is determined in the second special game, the process of step S2 of FIG. You may make it not change the display mode of this time display when it is a big hit. In addition, in the structure which digests in order of winning regardless of whether it is the 1st special figure reservation memory or the 2nd special figure reservation memory, either one of the 1st special figure reservation memory or the 2nd special figure reservation memory (For example, the first special figure hold memory), the current display may be changed when a rescue big hit.

  In the third embodiment, when the second special figure reservation memory is preferentially digested, one of the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory (for example, the first special figure reservation memory). 1 special figure storage) may be able to be a rescue jackpot. For example, the variation pattern “PB3-3” or “PB3-4” can be determined in either one of the first special game or the second special game (for example, the first special game). Also good. In addition, in the structure which digests in order of winning regardless of whether it is the 1st special figure reservation memory or the 2nd special figure reservation memory, either one of the 1st special figure reservation memory or the 2nd special figure reservation memory (For example, the first special figure hold storage) may be a rescue big hit.

  As described above, each embodiment has been described. Changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, in the first embodiment, the operation effect is executed when the variation pattern is “PA4-1”, “PA5-1”, “PB4-1”, “PB5-1” (that is, FIG. 28). As shown in FIG. 5, any one of the operation effect patterns A to F is determined), but the operation effect may be executed also in other variation patterns.

  In the second embodiment, the operation effect can be executed when the variation pattern is “PA4-1”, “PA5-1”, “PB4-1”, “PB5-1” (see FIG. 35). ), The operation effect may be executable even in other variation patterns.

  In the first embodiment, there are six types of operation effects (operation effect patterns) (operation effect patterns A to F), but there are 1 to 5 types of operation effects, 7 or more types. Also good. In the first embodiment, there are two types of character effects (first character effect and second character effect. However, the case where the color of the character a changes in the first character effect as shown in FIG. 29 is not considered. There may be cases where the color of the character b changes or not in the second character presentation), but there may be three or more kinds of character presentations.

  In the second embodiment, the types of operation effects (operation effect patterns) are four types (SEP-A to SEP-D), but the types of operation effects are one to three, five or more. May be. In the second embodiment, there are four types of cut-in effects (cut-in effect patterns) (J1E, J2E, K1E, K2E), but the types of cut-in effects are one to three, and five. It may be the above. When the type of operation effect is one (the same applies when there are two or more types), two or more operation periods are provided for the one type of operation effect and two or more types of cut-in effects are provided. The validity / invalidity of the second and subsequent operation periods and the type of cut-in effect that is executed when there is an operation may be varied depending on the first operation state (operation presence / absence).

  For example, in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second embodiment), the operation effect is executed during variable display. However, the operation effect may be executed other than during variable display. In other words, the operation effect may not be an effect executed during variable display. In place of or in addition to the variable display, for example, an operation effect may be executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the first embodiment, the content of the operation effect is determined according to the variation pattern (specifically, one of the operation effect patterns A to F is determined), but the big hit gaming state is set. In the aspect of executing the operation effect, for example, the content of the operation effect (for example, content that suggests or notifies whether or not the 16R probability change is made) may be determined according to the jackpot type. As an example, when the 8R probability change is made, the determination ratio of the operation effect patterns A and B is increased, and when it is 16R probability change, the determination ratio of the operation effect patterns D and F is increased, and at least the 8th round is finished. In this period, an operation effect may be executed according to the determined content in accordance with the player's operation. That is, the operation effect may be executed as the promotion effect.

  Moreover, in 1st Embodiment, although a character effect is performed according to operation of the push button 31B, operation for performing a character effect is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the operation of the push button 31B, the character effect may be executed according to the operation of the stick controller 31A. It should be noted that the character effect presentation mode may be different between when the push button 31B is operated and when the stick controller 31A is operated (for example, when the push button 31B is operated and the stick controller 31A). The execution ratio of the character production and the character production may be different depending on the operation of

  In the second embodiment, the cut-in performance is executed when the push button 31B is operated, but the operation for executing the cut-in effect is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the operation of the push button 31B, a cut-in effect may be executed according to the operation of the stick controller 31A. Note that different cut-in effects may be produced depending on whether the push button 31B is operated or the stick controller 31A is operated (for example, when the push button 31B is operated and the stick Different cut-in effects may be executed when the controller 31A is operated).

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second embodiment), when there is an operation during the operation effective period (operation period), the effect is executed in the display area of the image display device 5. Instead of or in addition to the effect, an effect using the movable accessory 17, the lamp 9 and the speaker 8 may be executed.

  In addition, the program and data for realizing each embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. You may take the form distributed by pre-installing in storage devices, such as a computer apparatus. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  In addition, the game execution form is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, in order to notify the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., to the effect control microcomputer, one change is made. Although an example in which the variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer using two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. (2) Before the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode is transmitted, and the second command is the so-called second in the case where the reach is reached (such as the reach type, the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect after a stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the “ratio” is, for example, a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. This includes the case where the ratios are different due to a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one is assigned 100% and the other is assigned 0%).

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above was a gaming machine in which a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid game ball into the game area to play a game. A game score for use in a game is given using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from record information of a game recording medium such as a card or a membership card, and a given game score, or The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by using a game score given by winning a game and driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the game area.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball It is also possible to apply the present invention to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as a prize and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine is shown that is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is ended based on the determination of the probable big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration shown in each of the above embodiments can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after completion.

  In addition, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying the display result is provided. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of special symbols that can each be identified and derives and displays a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the changing special symbol may be different from the confirmed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, the fixed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of special symbols that fluctuate.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can each be identified and derives and displays a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the decorative pattern that fluctuates may be different from the fixed decorative pattern that is derived and displayed as a variable display result. In other words, the fixed decorative symbols derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of decorative symbols that change.

  In addition, although each of 1st Embodiment, 2nd Embodiment, and 3rd Embodiment was demonstrated separately, the pachinko game machine 1 (same as the slot machine mentioned later) was shown in two or more embodiment. The contents may be executed in combination. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment executes at least one of the contents of the second embodiment and the contents of the third embodiment in addition to the contents of the first embodiment. Also good. Alternatively, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment executes at least one of the contents of the first embodiment and the contents of the third embodiment in addition to the contents of the second embodiment. Also good. Alternatively, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third embodiment executes at least one of the contents of the first embodiment and the contents of the second embodiment in addition to the contents of the third embodiment. Also good. Hereinafter, execution modes (fourth to seventh embodiments) obtained by combining two or more of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment will be described.

(Fourth embodiment)
The fourth embodiment is an embodiment in which the first embodiment and the second embodiment are combined. As the fourth embodiment, the first to third examples will be described.

(First example of the fourth embodiment)
The first example is an example in which the cut-in effect of the second embodiment is executed as the second character effect of the first embodiment.

  For example, the operation effective period of the push button 31B by the player is provided once during a period in which the first character effect is executed (hereinafter referred to as the first character effect period). Further, at the start of the first character effect period, one operation effect icon corresponding to the operation effective period is displayed. If the push button 31B is repeatedly hit a predetermined number of times within the operation effective period or if the push button 31B is pressed for a predetermined time or more within the operation effective period, the operation is made successful. In the first character effect period, the effect by the character a shown in FIG. 29 is executed in response to the player's operation (continuous hitting of the push button 31B, long press) within the operation effective period.

  If the operation is successful due to the player's repeated hits during the first character production period, the second character production is executed during the period during which the second character production is executed (hereinafter referred to as the second character production period). On the other hand, if the operation is successful due to a long press by the player, the second character effect is not executed. Also, the second character effect is not executed when the operation is not successful regardless of the type of operation.

  The operation effective period of the push button 31B by the player is provided a plurality of times in the second character effect period (for example, the number is selected by lottery). In addition, a plurality of operation effect icons corresponding to each operation effective period are displayed at the start of the second character effect period (for example, if there are two operation effective periods in the second character effect period, two operation effect icons are displayed. An operation effect icon is displayed, and when there are three operation effective periods within the second character effect period, three operation effect icons are displayed).

  In the second character effect period, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 is executed in response to the player's operation (pressing the push button 31B) within each operation effective period. That is, in the second character effect period, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 is executed instead of the effect by the character b shown in FIG. For example, if the second character production period has all three operation effective periods, a weak 1 cut-in effect is executed by an operation within the first operation effective period, and a strong 1 is obtained by an operation within the second operation effective period. The cut-in effect may be executed, and the strong 2 cut-in effect may be executed by an operation within the third operation effective period.

  During the second character effect period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect (or the strong 1 cut-in effect may be varied) according to the conditions. For example, as in the example shown in FIG. 42A, even when the number of remaining operation effect icons (total number of remaining operations in the second character effect period) is the same, it is displayed at the start of the second character effect period. If the number of operation effect icons (total number of operations that can be performed in the second character effect period) is different, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect may be different. For example, the third remaining time when the total number of possible operations is 3 and the second time when the total number of possible operations is 2 are the same with the total remaining number of operations being 0, but the former and the latter are the same. Since the number of possible operations is different, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect may be varied.

  Further, for example, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 42B, even if the number of remaining operation effect icons (total number of remaining operations in the second character effect period) is the same, the number of operation effect icons deleted (total number of operation times) ) May be different, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect may be different. For example, the third time when the total number of possible operations is 3 (the operation is both for the first and second times) and the second time when the total number of possible operations is 2 (the operation is the first time) are the total. Although the remaining number of operations is the same at 0, the total number of operations is different between the former and the latter, so the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect may be different.

  Note that the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 may be executed for a part of the plurality of operation effective periods of the second character effect period instead of the effect by the character shown in FIG. . For example, if the second character production period includes all three operation effective periods, the white character b is displayed by the operation within the first operation effective period, and the red character b is displayed by the operation within the second operation effective period. It is also possible to display the strong 2 cut-in effect by an operation within the third operation effective period.

(Second example of the fourth embodiment)
The second example is an example in which the cut-in effect of the second embodiment is executed as the first character effect of the first embodiment.

  For example, the operation effective period of the push button 31B by the player is provided a plurality of times in the first character effect period in which the first character effect is executed (for example, the number of times is selected by lottery). In addition, a plurality of operation effect icons corresponding to each operation effective period are displayed at the start of the first character effect period (for example, if there are two operation effective periods within the first character effect period, two operation effect icons are displayed. An operation effect icon is displayed, and when there are three operation effective periods within the first character effect period, three operation effect icons are displayed). In each effective operation period, if the push button 31B is repeatedly hit a predetermined number of times or if the push button 31B is pressed for a predetermined time longer than the predetermined time within the operation effective period, the operation is successful.

  In the first character effect period, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 is executed in accordance with the player's operation (repetitive hitting of the push button 31B, long press) within each operation effective period. That is, in the first character effect period, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 is executed instead of the effect by the character a shown in FIG. For example, if the first character production period has all three operation effective periods, a weak one cut-in production is executed with the operation successful within the first operation effective period, and the operation within the second operation effective period is successful. The strong 1 cut-in effect may be executed, and the strong 2 cut-in effect may be executed upon successful operation within the third operation effective period.

  In the first character effect period, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect (or the strong 1 cut-in effect may be varied) according to conditions. For example, as in the example shown in FIG. 42A, even when the number of remaining operation effect icons (total number of remaining operations in the first character effect period) is the same, it is displayed at the start of the first character effect period. If the number of operation effect icons (total number of operations that can be performed in the first character effect period) is different, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect may be different. For example, the third remaining time when the total number of possible operations is 3 and the second time when the total number of possible operations is 2 are the same with the total remaining number of operations being 0, but the former and the latter are the same. Since the number of possible operations is different, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect may be varied.

  Further, for example, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 42B, even if the number of remaining operation effect icons (total number of remaining operations during the first character effect period) is the same, the number of operation effect icons deleted (total number of operations) ) May be different, the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect may be different. For example, the third time when the total number of possible operations is 3 (the operation is both for the first and second times) and the second time when the total number of possible operations is 2 (the operation is the first time) are the total. Although the remaining number of operations is the same at 0, the total number of operations is different between the former and the latter, so the execution ratio of the strong 2 cut-in effect may be different.

  Note that the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 may be executed for a part of the plurality of operation effective periods of the first character effect period instead of the effect by the character shown in FIG. . For example, if the first character production period includes all three operation effective periods, the white character a is displayed by the successful operation within the first operation effective period, and the red character is displayed by the successful operation within the second operation effective period. a may be displayed, and the strong 2 cut-in effect may be executed by a successful operation within the third operation effective period.

  When the operation is successful due to the player's repeated hits in all the operation effective periods of the first character effect period, the second character effect is executed in the second character effect period. Specifically, the effect by the character b shown in FIG. 29 is executed in the second character effect period. On the other hand, if the operation is successful due to a long press by the player, the second character effect is not executed. Also, the second character effect is not executed when the operation is not successful regardless of the type of operation.

  It should be noted that the second character effect may be executed in the second character effect period even if the operation is successful due to the player's repeated hitting in a part of the operation effect period instead of the entire operation effect period. For example, the second character effect may be executed in the second character effect period when the operation is successful due to repeated hits by the player in the operation effective time period of half or more of the provided operation effect periods.

(Third example of the fourth embodiment)
The third example is an example in which the cut-in effect of the second embodiment is executed separately from the character effect (first character effect, second character effect) of the first embodiment.

  For example, the third example is an example in which the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 is executed in the second character effect period in addition to the effect by the character b shown in FIG. 29 as a modification of the first example. There may be. That is, in the first example, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 is executed in place of the effect by the character b shown in FIG. 29 in the second character effect period. In the third example, the second character effect is executed. In addition to the effect by the character b shown in FIG. 29, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 may be executed during the period. For example, when the second character production period includes all three operation effective periods, the white character b is displayed by an operation (such as pressing the push button 31B) within the first operation effective period, and the second operation effective period. The white character b is displayed by the internal operation (pressing the push button 31B, etc.), the red character b is displayed by the operation (pressing the push button 31B, etc.) within the third operation valid period, and a strong 2 cut-in effect is produced. It may be executed.

  Further, for example, the third embodiment is a modification of the second embodiment in which the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 is executed in addition to the effect by the character a shown in FIG. 29 during the first character effect period. It may be. That is, in the second example, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 is executed in place of the effect by the character a shown in FIG. 29 during the first character effect period. In the third example, the first character effect is executed. In addition to the effect by the character a shown in FIG. 29, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 38 may be executed during the period. For example, if the first character production period includes all three operation effective periods, the white character b is displayed by the successful operation within the first operation effective period, and the white character is displayed by the successful operation within the second operation effective period. b may be displayed, the red character b may be displayed in a successful operation within the third operation valid period, and the strong 2 cut-in effect may be executed.

  In the fourth embodiment (first to third examples), the timer gauge 5T shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the operation effect icons shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, 44 and 45, and It is good to avoid overlapping. The timer gauge 5T may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the operation effect icon. The same applies to the seventh embodiment.

  As mentioned above, according to 4th Embodiment, since the production | presentation performed and the ratio performed are different according to the frequency | count of operation, the frequency | count of operation, the kind of operation, etc., interest can be improved.

(Fifth embodiment)
The fifth embodiment is an embodiment in which the first embodiment and the third embodiment are combined. For example, within the period of FIGS. 51D to 51E, the processes of FIGS. 30A to 30E, the processes of FIGS. 31A to 31D, and the processes of FIG. ) To FIG. 32 (E1), FIG. 32 (E2), FIG. 32 (E3), and FIG. 33 (A) to FIG. 31 (E) may be executed. Note that the execution period of the character effect according to the first embodiment is not limited to the period illustrated in FIGS. 30 to 33 as described above, and thus any of FIGS. 51B to 51K. It is sufficient that the character effect is executed during this period, but the period shown in FIG. 51 (H) to FIG. 51 (K) is a scene of the relief jackpot and the execution frequency is low or the effect of the relief jackpot. Therefore, it is preferable that the character effect be executed within one of the periods shown in FIGS. 51 (B) to 51 (E).

  In the fifth embodiment, it is preferable that the timer gauge 5T shown in FIGS. 30 to 33 does not overlap with the current display area 5K and the current display shown in FIG. For example, the timer gauge 5T may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the current display area 5K or the current display. The same applies to the seventh embodiment.

  It should be noted that the rainbow character b may not be displayed in advance in the case of a rescue big hit. Thereby, an unexpectedness can be given in the relief jackpot. Alternatively, the rainbow character b may be displayed in advance in the case of a big hit. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to some players who have already confirmed the rainbow character b and are confident that it will be a relief jackpot when the temporary loss occurs. Note that when the rainbow character b may be displayed in advance even in the case of a relief jackpot, the display of the rainbow character b may be less noticeable than the white character b or the red character b. (For example, shorten the display time, reduce the display size, etc.). As a result, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to some players while giving unexpectedness in the relief jackpot.

  As mentioned above, according to 5th Embodiment, since the production | presentation performed according to the kind of operation differs, and since unexpectedness is given by specific alerting | reporting, an interest can be improved.

(Sixth embodiment)
The sixth embodiment is an embodiment in which the second embodiment and the third embodiment are combined. For example, the processes of FIGS. 39A to 41L may be executed within the period of FIGS. 51B to 51E.

  In the sixth embodiment, it is preferable that the operation effect icons shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, 44, and 45 do not overlap the current display area 5K and the current display shown in FIG. For example, an operation effect icon may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the current display area 5K or the current display. The same applies to the seventh embodiment.

  As described above, according to the sixth embodiment, the effect to be executed is different depending on the number of operations that can be performed, the number of operations, and the like.

(Seventh embodiment)
The seventh embodiment is an embodiment in which the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment are combined. That is, the seventh embodiment is an embodiment in which the fourth embodiment and the third embodiment are combined. For example, the processing described as the first example (or the second example or the third example) of the fourth embodiment is executed within the period of FIG. 51 (B) to FIG. 51 (E). May be.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game (game) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention can also be applied to (for example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus)).

  For example, the gaming machine in the first embodiment is a slot machine as described above capable of playing the game as described above, and operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, an effect button ( And a second operation on the operation means (eg, long press on the production button, etc.) Effect execution means (for example, an effect using a drum provided with a display unit or a design provided in the slot machine) according to the effect execution means (for example, a CPU of the slot machine) and the like. Executes the first operation effect in response to either the first operation or the second operation (for example, executes the operation effect A in response to a long press), and the first operation or In the slot machine, the first operation effect and the second operation effect are executed in response to the other operation of the operation 2 (for example, the operation result effect A and the operation result effect B are executed in response to repeated hits). There may be. The operation result effect A and the operation result effect B may be, for example, content that suggests or notifies the transition to a state where the probability of becoming a bonus or the like (or the probability of becoming a bonus or the like is increased, The content may suggest or notify the type of bonus or the like.

  In addition, the gaming machine in the second embodiment is a slot machine as described above. For example, when the remaining number of operations is a predetermined difference and the operable number of times is the first number, the remaining number of operations is the predetermined number. It may be a slot machine that executes a strong cut-in effect or the like at a rate different from that in the case where the number of operations is the second number. Further, for example, a strong cut-in effect or the like at a different ratio between the case where the remaining number of operations is a predetermined difference and the number of operations is the first number and the case where the remaining number of operations is the predetermined difference and the number of operations is the second number. May be a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine in the third embodiment is a slot machine as described above, for example, a specific display (for example, battle) that suggests the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a bonus) by a display mode. In the case of a slot machine controlled by a bonus or the like after winning, a specific display means for displaying a battle victory expectation or the like, and notification of whether it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, battle victory or A notifying means for notifying a battle defeat, etc., and in a single game, after a predetermined notification that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, notification of a battle defeat, etc.) ) May change and may be a slot machine that executes specific notification (for example, notification of battle victory) that the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state.

  Note that the gaming machines in the fourth to seventh embodiments, which are combinations of two or more of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment, are also described above. It may be a slot machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... First start prize memory display area 5HR ... Second start prize memory display area 5H ... Start prize Memory display area 6A ... Normal winning ball device 6B ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... First start opening switch 22B ... Second start opening switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (3)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
First informing means for informing the number of operable times for the operating means in an identifiable manner;
Wherein the number of operations that is operation on the operation enable period with respect to the operation unit, and a non-operating times that are not operation to the operation lifetime, of said total number of steering Sakukai number and the the non-steering Sakukai number a second informing means for identifiable informed at least one number,
An operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation result effect according to an operation on the operation means;
Specific display means for displaying a specific display that suggests the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state by a display mode;
A third notification means for performing notification regarding whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The operation effect execution means is configured such that a difference between the operable number of times and the total number of times is a predetermined difference and the operable number of times is a first number, and a difference between the operable number of times and the total number of times is the predetermined number of times. The specific operation result effect is executed as the operation result effect at a different rate from the difference and the case where the operable number of times is the second number of times,
The third notification means includes
It is possible to execute a predetermined notification that suggests that it is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a specific notification that indicates that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
In one of the variable display of the execution period, changes the display mode of the background display is performed the previous Kisho constant notification when a different special embodiment the normal mode, the display mode is the special mode of the background display to the normal mode gaming machine, wherein the Ru executable der pre Kitoku constant notification after the display mode of the specific display is changed to. A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
First informing means for informing the number of operable times for the operating means in an identifiable manner;
Wherein the number of operations that is operation on the operation enable period with respect to the operation unit, and a non-operating times that are not operation to the operation lifetime, of said total number of steering Sakukai number and the the non-steering Sakukai number a second informing means for identifiable informed at least one number,
An operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation result effect according to an operation on the operation means;
Specific display means for displaying a specific display that suggests the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state by a display mode;
A third notification means for performing notification regarding whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The operation demonstration execution means includes a case where the difference between the total number and the operation allowable number is the steering Sakukai number first number is a predetermined difference, the difference between the total number and the operation can count the is a predetermined difference the steering Sakukai number has performed an effect specific operation result as the operation result presentation at different rates in the case of the second number of times,
The third notification means includes
It is possible to execute a predetermined notification that suggests that it is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a specific notification that indicates that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
In one of the variable display of the execution period, changes the display mode of the background display is performed the previous Kisho constant notification when a different special embodiment the normal mode, the display mode is the special mode of the background display to the normal mode gaming machine, wherein the Ru executable der pre Kitoku constant notification after the display mode of the specific display is changed to. The specific display means performs the predetermined notification when the display mode of the background display is a special mode, and is different from the normal mode when the display mode of the background display changes from the special mode to the normal mode. When the specific display is displayed, the specific display mode can be changed stepwise after the specific display mode is changed before the specific notification is executed.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that.

Images